Remove Kbool from Kicad. Use Clipper instead.
This commit is contained in:
parent
7fd24c7f03
commit
1f277fd66d
|
@ -170,12 +170,8 @@ GLuint EDA_3D_CANVAS::CreateDrawGL_List()
|
|||
if( g_Parm_3D_Visu.m_Layers < 2 )
|
||||
g_Parm_3D_Visu.m_Layers = 2;
|
||||
|
||||
g_Parm_3D_Visu.m_BoardScale = 2.0 / max( g_Parm_3D_Visu.m_BoardSize.x,
|
||||
g_Parm_3D_Visu.m_BoardSize.y );
|
||||
|
||||
// @TODO: epoxy_width (board thickness) must be set by user,
|
||||
// because all boards thickness no not match with this setup:
|
||||
// double epoxy_width = 1.6; // epoxy width in mm
|
||||
g_Parm_3D_Visu.m_BoardScale = 2.0 / std::max( g_Parm_3D_Visu.m_BoardSize.x,
|
||||
g_Parm_3D_Visu.m_BoardSize.y );
|
||||
|
||||
g_Parm_3D_Visu.m_Epoxy_Width = pcb->GetDesignSettings().GetBoardThickness()
|
||||
* g_Parm_3D_Visu.m_BoardScale;
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ endif(APPLE)
|
|||
target_link_libraries( bitmap2component common polygon bitmaps
|
||||
${wxWidgets_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
potrace
|
||||
kbool )
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
||||
install(TARGETS bitmap2component
|
||||
DESTINATION ${KICAD_BIN}
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ bool FOOTPRINT_LIST::ReadFootprintFiles( wxArrayString& aFootprintsLibNames )
|
|||
|
||||
for( unsigned i=0; i<fpnames.GetCount(); ++i )
|
||||
{
|
||||
auto_ptr<MODULE> m( pi->FootprintLoad( libPath, fpnames[i] ) );
|
||||
std::auto_ptr<MODULE> m( pi->FootprintLoad( libPath, fpnames[i] ) );
|
||||
|
||||
// we're loading what we enumerated, all must be there.
|
||||
wxASSERT( m.get() );
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -98,7 +98,6 @@ target_link_libraries(cvpcb
|
|||
common
|
||||
bitmaps
|
||||
polygon
|
||||
kbool
|
||||
${wxWidgets_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
${OPENGL_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
${GDI_PLUS_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -217,7 +217,6 @@ target_link_libraries(eeschema
|
|||
common
|
||||
bitmaps
|
||||
polygon
|
||||
kbool
|
||||
${wxWidgets_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
${GDI_PLUS_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ endif(APPLE)
|
|||
###
|
||||
# Link executable target gerbview with correct libraries
|
||||
###
|
||||
target_link_libraries(gerbview common polygon bitmaps kbool
|
||||
target_link_libraries(gerbview common polygon bitmaps
|
||||
${OPENGL_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
${wxWidgets_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
${GDI_PLUS_LIBRARIES})
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -51,7 +51,6 @@ if(APPLE)
|
|||
common
|
||||
bitmaps
|
||||
polygon
|
||||
kbool
|
||||
${wxWidgets_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
)
|
||||
else(APPLE)
|
||||
|
@ -59,7 +58,6 @@ else(APPLE)
|
|||
common
|
||||
bitmaps
|
||||
polygon
|
||||
kbool
|
||||
${wxWidgets_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
${GDI_PLUS_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -82,7 +82,6 @@ target_link_libraries( pcb_calculator
|
|||
common
|
||||
bitmaps
|
||||
polygon
|
||||
kbool
|
||||
${wxWidgets_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -325,7 +325,6 @@ if (KICAD_SCRIPTING_MODULES)
|
|||
common
|
||||
bitmaps
|
||||
polygon
|
||||
kbool
|
||||
${wxWidgets_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
${OPENGL_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
${GDI_PLUS_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
|
@ -418,7 +417,6 @@ target_link_libraries(pcbnew
|
|||
common
|
||||
bitmaps
|
||||
polygon
|
||||
kbool
|
||||
${wxWidgets_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
${OPENGL_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
${GDI_PLUS_LIBRARIES}
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ void DIALOG_GENDRILL::InitDisplayParams()
|
|||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( min( pad->GetDrillSize().x, pad->GetDrillSize().y ) != 0 )
|
||||
if( std::min( pad->GetDrillSize().x, pad->GetDrillSize().y ) != 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( pad->GetAttribute() == PAD_HOLE_NOT_PLATED )
|
||||
m_notplatedPadsHoleCount++;
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -76,6 +76,7 @@ Load() TODO's
|
|||
#include <class_pcb_text.h>
|
||||
|
||||
using namespace boost::property_tree;
|
||||
using namespace std;
|
||||
|
||||
typedef EAGLE_PLUGIN::BIU BIU;
|
||||
typedef PTREE::const_assoc_iterator CA_ITER;
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ static bool s_AddCutoutToCurrentZone; // if true, the next outline
|
|||
static ZONE_CONTAINER* s_CurrentZone; // if != NULL, these ZONE_CONTAINER params will be used for the next zone
|
||||
static wxPoint s_CursorLastPosition; // in move zone outline, last cursor position. Used to calculate the move vector
|
||||
static PICKED_ITEMS_LIST s_PickedList; // a picked list to save zones for undo/redo command
|
||||
static PICKED_ITEMS_LIST _AuxiliaryList; // a picked list to store zones that are deleted or added when combined
|
||||
static PICKED_ITEMS_LIST s_AuxiliaryList; // a picked list to store zones that are deleted or added when combined
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::Add_Similar_Zone( wxDC* DC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone )
|
||||
|
@ -128,7 +128,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::duplicateZone( wxDC* aDC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone )
|
|||
zoneSettings.ExportSetting( *newZone );
|
||||
newZone->m_Poly->Hatch();
|
||||
|
||||
_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
SaveCopyOfZones( s_PickedList, GetBoard(), newZone->GetNet(), newZone->GetLayer() );
|
||||
GetBoard()->Add( newZone );
|
||||
|
@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::duplicateZone( wxDC* aDC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone )
|
|||
GetScreen()->SetCurItem( NULL ); // This outline may be deleted when merging outlines
|
||||
|
||||
// Combine zones if possible
|
||||
GetBoard()->OnAreaPolygonModified( &_AuxiliaryList, newZone );
|
||||
GetBoard()->OnAreaPolygonModified( &s_AuxiliaryList, newZone );
|
||||
|
||||
// Redraw zones
|
||||
GetBoard()->RedrawAreasOutlines( m_canvas, aDC, GR_OR, newZone->GetLayer() );
|
||||
|
@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::duplicateZone( wxDC* aDC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone )
|
|||
DisplayError( this, _( "Duplicate Zone: The outline of the duplicated zone fails DRC check!" ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, _AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, s_AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
SaveCopyInUndoList( s_PickedList, UR_UNSPECIFIED );
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearItemsList();
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::Start_Move_Zone_Corner( wxDC* DC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone,
|
|||
if ( IsNewCorner )
|
||||
aZone->m_Poly->DeleteCorner( corner_id );
|
||||
|
||||
_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
|
||||
SaveCopyOfZones( s_PickedList, GetBoard(), aZone->GetNet(),
|
||||
|
@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::Start_Move_Zone_Drag_Outline_Edge( wxDC* DC,
|
|||
s_CurrentZone = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
SaveCopyOfZones( s_PickedList, GetBoard(), aZone->GetNet(),
|
||||
aZone->GetLayer() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -302,7 +302,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::Start_Move_Zone_Outlines( wxDC* DC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone )
|
|||
}
|
||||
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
SaveCopyOfZones( s_PickedList, GetBoard(), aZone->GetNet(),
|
||||
aZone->GetLayer() );
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -332,7 +332,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::End_Move_Zone_Corner_Or_Outlines( wxDC* DC, ZONE_CONTAINER*
|
|||
|
||||
// Combine zones if possible
|
||||
wxBusyCursor dummy;
|
||||
GetBoard()->OnAreaPolygonModified( &_AuxiliaryList, aZone );
|
||||
GetBoard()->OnAreaPolygonModified( &s_AuxiliaryList, aZone );
|
||||
m_canvas->Refresh();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -341,7 +341,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::End_Move_Zone_Corner_Or_Outlines( wxDC* DC, ZONE_CONTAINER*
|
|||
if( ii < 0 )
|
||||
aZone = NULL; // was removed by combining zones
|
||||
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, _AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, s_AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
SaveCopyInUndoList(s_PickedList, UR_UNSPECIFIED);
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearItemsList(); // s_ItemsListPicker is no more owner of picked items
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -380,14 +380,14 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::Remove_Zone_Corner( wxDC* DC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone )
|
|||
GetBoard()->RedrawFilledAreas( m_canvas, DC, GR_XOR, layer );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_PickedList. ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
SaveCopyOfZones( s_PickedList, GetBoard(), aZone->GetNet(),
|
||||
aZone->GetLayer() );
|
||||
aZone->m_Poly->DeleteCorner( aZone->m_CornerSelection );
|
||||
|
||||
// modify zones outlines according to the new aZone shape
|
||||
GetBoard()->OnAreaPolygonModified( &_AuxiliaryList, aZone );
|
||||
GetBoard()->OnAreaPolygonModified( &s_AuxiliaryList, aZone );
|
||||
|
||||
if( DC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
@ -395,7 +395,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::Remove_Zone_Corner( wxDC* DC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone )
|
|||
GetBoard()->RedrawFilledAreas( m_canvas, DC, GR_OR, layer );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, _AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, s_AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
SaveCopyInUndoList(s_PickedList, UR_UNSPECIFIED);
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearItemsList(); // s_ItemsListPicker is no more owner of picked items
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -448,7 +448,7 @@ void Abort_Zone_Move_Corner_Or_Outlines( EDA_DRAW_PANEL* Panel, wxDC* DC )
|
|||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Panel->SetMouseCapture( NULL, NULL );
|
||||
_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_PickedList. ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
Panel->Refresh();
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ bool PCB_EDIT_FRAME::End_Zone( wxDC* DC )
|
|||
GetBoard()->RedrawFilledAreas( m_canvas, DC, GR_XOR, layer );
|
||||
|
||||
// Save initial zones configuration, for undo/redo, before adding new zone
|
||||
_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
SaveCopyOfZones(s_PickedList, GetBoard(), zone->GetNet(), zone->GetLayer() );
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ bool PCB_EDIT_FRAME::End_Zone( wxDC* DC )
|
|||
GetScreen()->SetCurItem( NULL ); // This outline can be deleted when merging outlines
|
||||
|
||||
// Combine zones if possible :
|
||||
GetBoard()->OnAreaPolygonModified( &_AuxiliaryList, zone );
|
||||
GetBoard()->OnAreaPolygonModified( &s_AuxiliaryList, zone );
|
||||
|
||||
// Redraw the real edge zone :
|
||||
GetBoard()->RedrawAreasOutlines( m_canvas, DC, GR_OR, layer );
|
||||
|
@ -784,7 +784,7 @@ bool PCB_EDIT_FRAME::End_Zone( wxDC* DC )
|
|||
DisplayError( this, _( "Area: DRC outline error" ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, _AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, s_AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
SaveCopyInUndoList(s_PickedList, UR_UNSPECIFIED);
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearItemsList(); // s_ItemsListPicker is no more owner of picked items
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -838,7 +838,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::Edit_Zone_Params( wxDC* DC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone )
|
|||
|
||||
// Save initial zones configuration, for undo/redo, before adding new zone
|
||||
// note the net name and the layer can be changed, so we must save all zones
|
||||
_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
SaveCopyOfZones(s_PickedList, GetBoard(), -1, -1 );
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -866,7 +866,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::Edit_Zone_Params( wxDC* DC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone )
|
|||
|
||||
if( edited == ZONE_ABORT )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_AuxiliaryList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearListAndDeleteItems();
|
||||
return;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -875,7 +875,7 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::Edit_Zone_Params( wxDC* DC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone )
|
|||
|
||||
if( edited == ZONE_EXPORT_VALUES )
|
||||
{
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, _AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, s_AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
SaveCopyInUndoList(s_PickedList, UR_UNSPECIFIED);
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearItemsList(); // s_ItemsListPicker is no more owner of picked items
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
@ -896,12 +896,12 @@ void PCB_EDIT_FRAME::Edit_Zone_Params( wxDC* DC, ZONE_CONTAINER* aZone )
|
|||
aZone->SetNetName( net->GetNetname() );
|
||||
|
||||
// Combine zones if possible
|
||||
GetBoard()->OnAreaPolygonModified( &_AuxiliaryList, aZone );
|
||||
GetBoard()->OnAreaPolygonModified( &s_AuxiliaryList, aZone );
|
||||
|
||||
// Redraw the real new zone outlines
|
||||
GetBoard()->RedrawAreasOutlines( m_canvas, DC, GR_OR, -1 );
|
||||
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, _AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
UpdateCopyOfZonesList( s_PickedList, s_AuxiliaryList, GetBoard() );
|
||||
SaveCopyInUndoList(s_PickedList, UR_UNSPECIFIED);
|
||||
|
||||
s_PickedList.ClearItemsList(); // s_ItemsListPicker is no longer owner of picked items
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -174,19 +174,26 @@ int SaveCopyOfZones( PICKED_ITEMS_LIST& aPickList, BOARD* aPcb, int aNetCode, in
|
|||
* @param aPcb = the Board
|
||||
*
|
||||
* aAuxiliaryList is a list of pickers updated by zone algorithms:
|
||||
* This list cointains zones which were added or deleted during the zones combine process
|
||||
* This list contains zones which were added or deleted during the zones combine process
|
||||
* aPickList :is a list of zones that can be modified (changed or deleted, or not modified)
|
||||
* Typically, this is the list of existing zones on the layer of the edited zone,
|
||||
* before any change.
|
||||
* >> if the picked zone is not changed, it is removed from list
|
||||
* >> if the picked zone was deleted (i.e. not found in boad list), the picker is modified:
|
||||
* - its status becomes UR_DELETED
|
||||
* - the aAuxiliaryList corresponding picker is removed (if not found : set an error)
|
||||
* >> if the picked zone was flagged as UR_NEW, and was deleted (i.e. not found in boad list),
|
||||
* - the picker is removed
|
||||
* - the zone itself if really deleted
|
||||
* - the aAuxiliaryList corresponding picker is removed (if not found : set an error)
|
||||
* >> if the picked zone was deleted (i.e. not found in board list), the picker is modified:
|
||||
* its status becomes UR_DELETED
|
||||
* the aAuxiliaryList corresponding picker is removed (if not found : set an error)
|
||||
* >> if the picked zone was flagged as UR_NEW, and was after deleted ,
|
||||
* perhaps combined with an other zone (i.e. not found in board list):
|
||||
* the picker is removed
|
||||
* the zone itself if really deleted
|
||||
* the aAuxiliaryList corresponding picker is removed (if not found : set an error)
|
||||
* After aPickList is cleaned, the aAuxiliaryList is read
|
||||
* All pickers flagged UR_NEW are moved to aPickList
|
||||
* (the corresponding zones are zone that were created by the zone combine process, mainly when adding cutaout areas)
|
||||
* (the corresponding zones are zone that were created by the zone normalize and combine process,
|
||||
* mainly when adding cutout areas, or creating self intersecting contours)
|
||||
* All pickers flagged UR_DELETED are removed, and the coresponding zones actually deleted
|
||||
* (the corresponding zones are new zone that were created by the zone normalize process,
|
||||
* when creating self intersecting contours, and after combined with an existing zone.
|
||||
* At the end of the update process the aAuxiliaryList must be void,
|
||||
* because all pickers created by the combine process
|
||||
* must have been removed (removed for new and deleted zones, or moved in aPickList.)
|
||||
|
@ -274,15 +281,21 @@ void UpdateCopyOfZonesList( PICKED_ITEMS_LIST& aPickList,
|
|||
|
||||
|
||||
// Add new zones in main pick list, and remove pickers from Auxiliary List
|
||||
for( unsigned ii = 0; ii < aAuxiliaryList.GetCount(); ii++ )
|
||||
for( unsigned ii = 0; ii < aAuxiliaryList.GetCount(); )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( aAuxiliaryList.GetPickedItemStatus( ii ) == UR_NEW )
|
||||
{
|
||||
ITEM_PICKER picker = aAuxiliaryList.GetItemWrapper( ii );
|
||||
aPickList.PushItem( picker );
|
||||
aAuxiliaryList.RemovePicker( ii );
|
||||
ii--;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if( aAuxiliaryList.GetPickedItemStatus( ii ) == UR_DELETED )
|
||||
{
|
||||
delete aAuxiliaryList.GetPickedItemLink( ii );
|
||||
aAuxiliaryList.RemovePicker( ii );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
ii++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// Should not occur:
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -211,12 +211,12 @@ bool BOARD::OnAreaPolygonModified( PICKED_ITEMS_LIST* aModifiedZonesList,
|
|||
|
||||
// Test for bad areas: all zones must have more than 2 corners:
|
||||
// Note: should not happen, but just in case.
|
||||
for( unsigned ia1 = 0; ia1 < m_ZoneDescriptorList.size() - 1; )
|
||||
for( unsigned ii = 0; ii < m_ZoneDescriptorList.size(); )
|
||||
{
|
||||
ZONE_CONTAINER* zone = m_ZoneDescriptorList[ia1];
|
||||
ZONE_CONTAINER* zone = m_ZoneDescriptorList[ii];
|
||||
|
||||
if( zone->GetNumCorners() >= 3 )
|
||||
ia1++;
|
||||
ii++;
|
||||
else // Remove zone because it is incorrect:
|
||||
RemoveArea( aModifiedZonesList, zone );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -267,25 +267,25 @@ bool BOARD::CombineAllAreasInNet( PICKED_ITEMS_LIST* aDeletedList, int aNetCode,
|
|||
if( curr_area->GetIsKeepout() != area2->GetIsKeepout() )
|
||||
continue;
|
||||
|
||||
if( curr_area->GetLayer() == area2->GetLayer() )
|
||||
if( curr_area->GetLayer() != area2->GetLayer() )
|
||||
continue;
|
||||
|
||||
CRect b2 = area2->m_Poly->GetCornerBounds();
|
||||
if( !( b1.left > b2.right || b1.right < b2.left
|
||||
|| b1.bottom > b2.top || b1.top < b2.bottom ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
CRect b2 = area2->m_Poly->GetCornerBounds();
|
||||
if( !( b1.left > b2.right || b1.right < b2.left
|
||||
|| b1.bottom > b2.top || b1.top < b2.bottom ) )
|
||||
// check area2 against curr_area
|
||||
if( curr_area->utility || area2->utility || aUseUtility == false )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// check area2 against curr_area
|
||||
if( curr_area->utility || area2->utility || aUseUtility == false )
|
||||
bool ret = TestAreaIntersection( curr_area, area2 );
|
||||
|
||||
if( ret )
|
||||
ret = CombineAreas( aDeletedList, curr_area, area2 );
|
||||
|
||||
if( ret )
|
||||
{
|
||||
bool ret = TestAreaIntersection( curr_area, area2 );
|
||||
|
||||
if( ret )
|
||||
ret = CombineAreas( aDeletedList, curr_area, area2 );
|
||||
|
||||
if( ret )
|
||||
{
|
||||
mod_ia1 = true;
|
||||
modified = true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
mod_ia1 = true;
|
||||
modified = true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -424,7 +424,7 @@ bool BOARD::TestAreaIntersection( ZONE_CONTAINER* area_ref, ZONE_CONTAINER* area
|
|||
|
||||
if( poly1->TestPointInside( x, y ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return 1;
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -435,11 +435,11 @@ bool BOARD::TestAreaIntersection( ZONE_CONTAINER* area_ref, ZONE_CONTAINER* area
|
|||
|
||||
if( poly2->TestPointInside( x, y ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return 1;
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
return 0;
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -465,10 +465,6 @@ bool BOARD::CombineAreas( PICKED_ITEMS_LIST* aDeletedList, ZONE_CONTAINER* area_
|
|||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// polygons intersect, combine them
|
||||
// TODO: test here if areas intersect and combine only if so
|
||||
|
||||
#if 0
|
||||
// do not set to 1 (not fully working): only for me (JP. Charras) until this code is finished
|
||||
KI_POLYGON_WITH_HOLES areaRefPoly;
|
||||
KI_POLYGON_WITH_HOLES areaToMergePoly;
|
||||
CopyPolysListToKiPolygonWithHole( area_ref->m_Poly->m_CornersList, areaRefPoly );
|
||||
|
@ -478,10 +474,20 @@ bool BOARD::CombineAreas( PICKED_ITEMS_LIST* aDeletedList, ZONE_CONTAINER* area_
|
|||
mergedOutlines.push_back( areaRefPoly );
|
||||
mergedOutlines |= areaToMergePoly;
|
||||
|
||||
// We can have more than one polygon with holes in mergedOutlines
|
||||
// depending on the complexity of outlines
|
||||
// We should have one polygon with hole
|
||||
// We can have 2 polygons with hole, if the 2 initial polygons have only one common corner
|
||||
// and therefore cannot be merged (they are dectected as intersecting)
|
||||
// but we should never have more than 2 polys
|
||||
if( mergedOutlines.size() > 2 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxLogMessage(wxT("BOARD::CombineAreas error: more than 2 polys after merging") );
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
areaRefPoly = mergedOutlines[0]; // TODO: read and create all created polygons
|
||||
if( mergedOutlines.size() > 1 )
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
|
||||
areaRefPoly = mergedOutlines[0];
|
||||
area_ref->m_Poly->RemoveAllContours();
|
||||
|
||||
KI_POLYGON_WITH_HOLES::iterator_type corner = areaRefPoly.begin();
|
||||
|
@ -509,76 +515,6 @@ bool BOARD::CombineAreas( PICKED_ITEMS_LIST* aDeletedList, ZONE_CONTAINER* area_
|
|||
area_ref->m_Poly->CloseLastContour();
|
||||
hole++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
#else
|
||||
void armBoolEng( Bool_Engine* aBooleng, bool aConvertHoles = false );
|
||||
Bool_Engine* booleng = new Bool_Engine();
|
||||
armBoolEng( booleng );
|
||||
|
||||
area_ref->m_Poly->AddPolygonsToBoolEng( booleng, GROUP_A );
|
||||
area_to_combine->m_Poly->AddPolygonsToBoolEng(booleng, GROUP_B );
|
||||
booleng->Do_Operation( BOOL_OR );
|
||||
|
||||
// create area with external contour: Recreate only area edges, NOT holes
|
||||
if( booleng->StartPolygonGet() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( booleng->GetPolygonPointEdgeType() == KB_INSIDE_EDGE )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DisplayError( NULL, wxT( "BOARD::CombineAreas() error: unexpected hole descriptor" ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
area_ref->m_Poly->RemoveAllContours();
|
||||
|
||||
// foreach point in the polygon
|
||||
bool first = true;
|
||||
|
||||
while( booleng->PolygonHasMorePoints() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
int x = (int) booleng->GetPolygonXPoint();
|
||||
int y = (int) booleng->GetPolygonYPoint();
|
||||
|
||||
if( first )
|
||||
{
|
||||
first = false;
|
||||
area_ref->m_Poly->Start( area_ref->GetLayer(
|
||||
), x, y, area_ref->m_Poly->GetHatchStyle() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
area_ref->m_Poly->AppendCorner( x, y );
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
area_ref->m_Poly->CloseLastContour();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// add holes
|
||||
bool show_error = true;
|
||||
|
||||
while( booleng->StartPolygonGet() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// we expect all vertex are holes inside the main outline
|
||||
if( booleng->GetPolygonPointEdgeType() != KB_INSIDE_EDGE )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( show_error ) // show this error only once, if happens
|
||||
DisplayError( NULL,
|
||||
wxT( "BOARD::CombineAreas() error: unexpected outside contour descriptor" ) );
|
||||
|
||||
show_error = false;
|
||||
continue;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
while( booleng->PolygonHasMorePoints() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
int x = (int) booleng->GetPolygonXPoint();
|
||||
int y = (int) booleng->GetPolygonYPoint();
|
||||
area_ref->m_Poly->AppendCorner( x, y );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
area_ref->m_Poly->CloseLastContour();
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
}
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
RemoveArea( aDeletedList, area_to_combine );
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -822,7 +758,7 @@ bool DRC::doEdgeZoneDrc( ZONE_CONTAINER* aArea, int aCornerIndex )
|
|||
for( int ia2 = 0; ia2 < m_pcb->GetAreaCount(); ia2++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
ZONE_CONTAINER* area_to_test = m_pcb->GetArea( ia2 );
|
||||
int zone_clearance = max( area_to_test->m_ZoneClearance,
|
||||
int zone_clearance = std::max( area_to_test->m_ZoneClearance,
|
||||
aArea->m_ZoneClearance );
|
||||
|
||||
// test for same layer
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ set(POLYGON_SRCS
|
|||
math_for_graphics.cpp
|
||||
PolyLine.cpp
|
||||
polygon_test_point_inside.cpp
|
||||
clipper.cpp
|
||||
)
|
||||
|
||||
add_library(polygon STATIC ${POLYGON_SRCS})
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -16,16 +16,12 @@
|
|||
#include <math_for_graphics.h>
|
||||
#include <polygon_test_point_inside.h>
|
||||
|
||||
enum m_SideStyle { STRAIGHT }; // side styles
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
CPolyLine::CPolyLine()
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_hatchStyle = NO_HATCH;
|
||||
m_hatchPitch = 0;
|
||||
m_layer = 0;
|
||||
m_utility = 0;
|
||||
m_Kbool_Poly_Engine = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -34,409 +30,6 @@ CPolyLine::CPolyLine()
|
|||
CPolyLine::~CPolyLine()
|
||||
{
|
||||
UnHatch();
|
||||
|
||||
if( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine )
|
||||
delete m_Kbool_Poly_Engine;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Function armBoolEng
|
||||
* Initialise parameters used in kbool
|
||||
* @param aBooleng = pointer to the Bool_Engine to initialise
|
||||
* @param aConvertHoles = mode for holes when a boolean operation is made
|
||||
* true: holes are linked into outer contours by double overlapping segments
|
||||
* false: holes are not linked: in this mode contours are added clockwise
|
||||
* and polygons added counter clockwise are holes (default)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void armBoolEng( Bool_Engine* aBooleng, bool aConvertHoles = false );
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Function NormalizeWithKbool
|
||||
* Use the Kbool Library to clip contours: if outlines are crossing, the self-crossing polygon
|
||||
* is converted to non self-crossing polygon by adding extra points at the crossing locations
|
||||
* and reordering corners
|
||||
* if more than one outside contour are found, extra CPolyLines will be created
|
||||
* because copper areas have only one outside contour
|
||||
* Therefore, if this results in new CPolyLines, return them as std::vector pa
|
||||
* @param aExtraPolyList: pointer on a std::vector<CPolyLine*> to store extra CPolyLines
|
||||
* (when after normalization, there is more than one polygon with holes)
|
||||
* @return number of external contours, or -1 if error
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int CPolyLine::NormalizeWithKbool( std::vector<CPolyLine*>* aExtraPolyList )
|
||||
{
|
||||
std::vector <void*> hole_array; // list of holes
|
||||
std::vector<int>* hole; // used to store corners for a given hole
|
||||
CPolyLine* polyline;
|
||||
int n_ext_cont = 0; // CPolyLine count
|
||||
|
||||
/* Creates a bool engine from this CPolyLine.
|
||||
* Normalized outlines and holes will be in m_Kbool_Poly_Engine
|
||||
* If some polygons are self crossing, after running the Kbool Engine, self crossing polygons
|
||||
* will be converted in non self crossing polygons by inserting extra points at the crossing locations
|
||||
* True holes are combined if possible
|
||||
*/
|
||||
MakeKboolPoly();
|
||||
|
||||
UnHatch();
|
||||
|
||||
/* now, recreate polys
|
||||
* if more than one outside contour are found, extra CPolyLines will be created
|
||||
* because copper areas have only one outside contour
|
||||
* the first outside contour found is the new "this" outside contour
|
||||
* if others outside contours are found we create new CPolyLines
|
||||
* Note: if there are holes in polygons, we must store them
|
||||
* and when all outside contours are found, search the corresponding outside contour for each hole
|
||||
*/
|
||||
while( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->StartPolygonGet() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// See if the current polygon is flagged as a hole
|
||||
if( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->GetPolygonPointEdgeType() == KB_INSIDE_EDGE )
|
||||
{
|
||||
hole = new std::vector<int>;
|
||||
hole_array.push_back( hole );
|
||||
|
||||
while( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->PolygonHasMorePoints() ) // store hole
|
||||
{
|
||||
int x = (int) m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->GetPolygonXPoint();
|
||||
int y = (int) m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->GetPolygonYPoint();
|
||||
hole->push_back( x );
|
||||
hole->push_back( y );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if( n_ext_cont == 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// first external contour, replace this poly
|
||||
m_CornersList.clear();
|
||||
bool first = true;
|
||||
|
||||
while( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->PolygonHasMorePoints() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// foreach point in the polygon
|
||||
int x = (int) m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->GetPolygonXPoint();
|
||||
int y = (int) m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->GetPolygonYPoint();
|
||||
|
||||
if( first )
|
||||
{
|
||||
first = false;
|
||||
Start( GetLayer(), x, y, GetHatchStyle() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
AppendCorner( x, y );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
CloseLastContour();
|
||||
n_ext_cont++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if( aExtraPolyList ) // a new outside contour is found: create a new CPolyLine
|
||||
{
|
||||
polyline = new CPolyLine;
|
||||
polyline->ImportSettings( this );
|
||||
aExtraPolyList->push_back( polyline ); // put it in array
|
||||
bool first = true;
|
||||
|
||||
while( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->PolygonHasMorePoints() ) // read next external contour
|
||||
{
|
||||
int x = (int) m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->GetPolygonXPoint();
|
||||
int y = (int) m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->GetPolygonYPoint();
|
||||
|
||||
if( first )
|
||||
{
|
||||
first = false;
|
||||
polyline->Start( GetLayer(), x, y, GetHatchStyle() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
polyline->AppendCorner( x, y );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
polyline->CloseLastContour();
|
||||
n_ext_cont++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// now add cutouts to the corresponding CPolyLine(s)
|
||||
for( unsigned ii = 0; ii < hole_array.size(); ii++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
hole = (std::vector<int>*)hole_array[ii];
|
||||
polyline = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
if( n_ext_cont == 1 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
polyline = this;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
// find the polygon that contains this hole
|
||||
// testing one corner inside is enought because a hole is entirely inside the polygon
|
||||
// so we test only the first corner
|
||||
int x = (*hole)[0];
|
||||
int y = (*hole)[1];
|
||||
|
||||
if( TestPointInside( x, y ) )
|
||||
polyline = this;
|
||||
else if( aExtraPolyList )
|
||||
{
|
||||
for( int ext_ic = 0; ext_ic<n_ext_cont - 1; ext_ic++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( (*aExtraPolyList)[ext_ic]->TestPointInside( x, y ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
polyline = (*aExtraPolyList)[ext_ic];
|
||||
break;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if( !polyline )
|
||||
wxASSERT( 0 );
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
for( unsigned ii = 0; ii< (*hole).size(); ii++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
int x = (*hole)[ii]; ii++;
|
||||
int y = (*hole)[ii];
|
||||
polyline->AppendCorner( x, y );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
polyline->CloseLastContour();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
delete m_Kbool_Poly_Engine;
|
||||
m_Kbool_Poly_Engine = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
// free hole list
|
||||
for( unsigned ii = 0; ii < hole_array.size(); ii++ )
|
||||
delete (std::vector<int>*)hole_array[ii];
|
||||
|
||||
return n_ext_cont;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Function AddPolygonsToBoolEng
|
||||
* Add a CPolyLine to a kbool engine, preparing a boolean op between polygons
|
||||
* @param aBooleng : pointer on a bool engine (handle a set of polygons)
|
||||
* @param aGroup : group to fill (aGroup = GROUP_A or GROUP_B) operations are made between GROUP_A and GROUP_B
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int CPolyLine::AddPolygonsToBoolEng( Bool_Engine* aBooleng, GroupType aGroup )
|
||||
{
|
||||
int count = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
/* Convert the current polyline contour to a kbool polygon: */
|
||||
MakeKboolPoly();
|
||||
|
||||
/* add the resulting kbool set of polygons to the current kcool engine */
|
||||
while( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->StartPolygonGet() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( aBooleng->StartPolygonAdd( GROUP_A ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
while( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->PolygonHasMorePoints() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
int x = (int) m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->GetPolygonXPoint();
|
||||
int y = (int) m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->GetPolygonYPoint();
|
||||
aBooleng->AddPoint( x, y );
|
||||
count++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
aBooleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
}
|
||||
m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
delete m_Kbool_Poly_Engine;
|
||||
m_Kbool_Poly_Engine = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
return count;
|
||||
}
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Function MakeKboolPoly
|
||||
* fill a kbool engine with a closed polyline contour
|
||||
* normalize self-intersecting contours
|
||||
* @return error: 0 if Ok, 1 if error
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int CPolyLine::MakeKboolPoly()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine )
|
||||
{
|
||||
delete m_Kbool_Poly_Engine;
|
||||
m_Kbool_Poly_Engine = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if( !GetClosed() )
|
||||
return 1; // error
|
||||
|
||||
int polycount = GetContoursCount();
|
||||
int last_contour = polycount - 1;
|
||||
|
||||
for( int icont = 0; icont <= last_contour; icont++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// Fill a kbool engine for this contour,
|
||||
// and combine it with previous contours
|
||||
Bool_Engine* booleng = new Bool_Engine();
|
||||
armBoolEng( booleng, false );
|
||||
|
||||
if( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine ) // a previous contour exists. Put it in new engine
|
||||
{
|
||||
while( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->StartPolygonGet() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( booleng->StartPolygonAdd( GROUP_A ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
while( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->PolygonHasMorePoints() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
int x = (int) m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->GetPolygonXPoint();
|
||||
int y = (int) m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->GetPolygonYPoint();
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( x, y );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
}
|
||||
m_Kbool_Poly_Engine->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
int ic_st = GetContourStart( icont );
|
||||
int ic_end = GetContourEnd( icont );
|
||||
|
||||
if( !booleng->StartPolygonAdd( GROUP_B ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxASSERT( 0 );
|
||||
return 1; // error
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// Enter this contour to booleng
|
||||
for( int ic = ic_st; ic <= ic_end; ic++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
int x1 = m_CornersList[ic].x;
|
||||
int y1 = m_CornersList[ic].y;
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( x1, y1 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// close list added to the bool engine
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
|
||||
/* now combine polygon to the previous polygons.
|
||||
* note: the first polygon is the outline contour, and others are holes inside the first polygon
|
||||
* The first polygon is ORed with nothing, but is is a trick to sort corners (vertex)
|
||||
* clockwise with the kbool engine.
|
||||
* Others polygons are substract to the outline and corners will be ordered counter clockwise
|
||||
* by the kbool engine
|
||||
*/
|
||||
if( icont != 0 ) // substract hole to outside ( if the outline contour is take in account)
|
||||
{
|
||||
booleng->Do_Operation( BOOL_A_SUB_B );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else // add outside or add holes if we do not use the outline contour
|
||||
{
|
||||
booleng->Do_Operation( BOOL_OR );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// now use result as new polygon (delete the old one if exists)
|
||||
if( m_Kbool_Poly_Engine )
|
||||
delete m_Kbool_Poly_Engine;
|
||||
|
||||
m_Kbool_Poly_Engine = booleng;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
return 0;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Function armBoolEng
|
||||
* Initialise parameters used in kbool
|
||||
* @param aBooleng = pointer to the Bool_Engine to initialise
|
||||
* @param aConvertHoles = mode for holes when a boolean operation is made
|
||||
* true: in resulting polygon, holes are linked into outer contours by double overlapping segments
|
||||
* false: in resulting polygons, holes are not linked: they are separate polygons
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void armBoolEng( Bool_Engine* aBooleng, bool aConvertHoles )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// set some global vals to arm the boolean engine
|
||||
|
||||
// input points are scaled up with GetDGrid() * GetGrid()
|
||||
|
||||
// DGRID is only meant to make fractional parts of input data which
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* The input data scaled up with DGrid is related to the accuracy the user has in his input data.
|
||||
* User data with a minimum accuracy of 0.001, means set the DGrid to 1000.
|
||||
* The input data may contain data with a minimum accuracy much smaller, but by setting the DGrid
|
||||
* everything smaller than 1/DGrid is rounded.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* DGRID is only meant to make fractional parts of input data which can be
|
||||
* doubles, part of the integers used in vertexes within the boolean algorithm.
|
||||
* And therefore DGRID bigger than 1 is not usefull, you would only loose accuracy.
|
||||
* Within the algorithm all input data is multiplied with DGRID, and the result
|
||||
* is rounded to an integer.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
double DGRID = 1000.0; // round coordinate X or Y value in calculations to this (initial value = 1000.0 in kbool example)
|
||||
// kbool uses DGRID to convert float user units to integer
|
||||
// kbool unit = (int)(user unit * DGRID)
|
||||
// Note: in kicad, coordinates are already integer so DGRID could be set to 1
|
||||
// we can choose 1.0,
|
||||
// but choose DGRID = 1000.0 solves some filling problems
|
||||
// (perhaps because this allows a better precision in kbool internal calculations
|
||||
|
||||
double MARGE = 1.0 / DGRID; // snap with in this range points to lines in the intersection routines
|
||||
// should always be >= 1/DGRID a MARGE >= 10/DGRID is ok
|
||||
// this is also used to remove small segments and to decide when
|
||||
// two segments are in line. ( initial value = 0.001 )
|
||||
// For kicad we choose MARGE = 1/DGRID
|
||||
|
||||
double CORRECTIONFACTOR = 0.0; // correct the polygons by this number: used in BOOL_CORRECTION operation
|
||||
// this operation shrinks a polygon if CORRECTIONFACTOR < 0
|
||||
// or stretch it if CORRECTIONFACTOR > 0
|
||||
// the size change is CORRECTIONFACTOR (holes are correctly handled)
|
||||
double CORRECTIONABER = 1.0; // the accuracy for the rounded shapes used in correction
|
||||
double ROUNDFACTOR = 1.5; // when will we round the correction shape to a circle
|
||||
double SMOOTHABER = 10.0; // accuracy when smoothing a polygon
|
||||
double MAXLINEMERGE = 1000.0; // leave as is, segments of this length in smoothen
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Grid makes sure that the integer data used within the algorithm has room for extra intersections
|
||||
* smaller than the smallest number within the input data.
|
||||
* The input data scaled up with DGrid is related to the accuracy the user has in his input data.
|
||||
* Another scaling with Grid is applied on top of it to create space in the integer number for
|
||||
* even smaller numbers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int GRID = (int) ( 10000.0 / DGRID ); // initial value = 10000 in kbool example but we use
|
||||
|
||||
// 10000/DGRID because the scaling is made by DGRID
|
||||
// on integer pcbnew units and the global scaling
|
||||
// ( GRID*DGRID) must be < 30000 to avoid overflow
|
||||
// in calculations (made in long long in kbool)
|
||||
if( GRID <= 1 ) // Cannot be null!
|
||||
GRID = 1;
|
||||
|
||||
aBooleng->SetMarge( MARGE );
|
||||
aBooleng->SetGrid( GRID );
|
||||
aBooleng->SetDGrid( DGRID );
|
||||
aBooleng->SetCorrectionFactor( CORRECTIONFACTOR );
|
||||
aBooleng->SetCorrectionAber( CORRECTIONABER );
|
||||
aBooleng->SetSmoothAber( SMOOTHABER );
|
||||
aBooleng->SetMaxlinemerge( MAXLINEMERGE );
|
||||
aBooleng->SetRoundfactor( ROUNDFACTOR );
|
||||
aBooleng->SetWindingRule( true ); // This is the default kbool value
|
||||
|
||||
if( aConvertHoles )
|
||||
{
|
||||
#if 1 // Can be set to 1 for kbool version >= 2.1, must be set to 0 for previous versions
|
||||
// SetAllowNonTopHoleLinking() exists only in kbool >= 2.1
|
||||
aBooleng->SetAllowNonTopHoleLinking( false ); // Default = true, but i have problems (filling errors) when true
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
aBooleng->SetLinkHoles( true ); // holes will be connected by double overlapping segments
|
||||
aBooleng->SetOrientationEntryMode( false ); // all polygons are contours, not holes
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
aBooleng->SetLinkHoles( false ); // holes will not be connected by double overlapping segments
|
||||
aBooleng->SetOrientationEntryMode( true ); // holes are entered counter clockwise
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -445,12 +38,119 @@ void armBoolEng( Bool_Engine* aBooleng, bool aConvertHoles )
|
|||
* Convert a self-intersecting polygon to one (or more) non self-intersecting polygon(s)
|
||||
* @param aNewPolygonList = a std::vector<CPolyLine*> reference where to store new CPolyLine
|
||||
* needed by the normalization
|
||||
* @return the polygon count (always >= 1, becuse there is at lesat one polygon)
|
||||
* @return the polygon count (always >= 1, because there is at least one polygon)
|
||||
* There are new polygons only if the polygon count is > 1
|
||||
*/
|
||||
#include "clipper.hpp"
|
||||
int CPolyLine::NormalizeAreaOutlines( std::vector<CPolyLine*>* aNewPolygonList )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return NormalizeWithKbool( aNewPolygonList );
|
||||
ClipperLib::Polygon raw_polygon;
|
||||
ClipperLib::Polygons normalized_polygons;
|
||||
|
||||
unsigned corners_count = m_CornersList.size();
|
||||
|
||||
KI_POLYGON_SET polysholes;
|
||||
KI_POLYGON_WITH_HOLES mainpoly;
|
||||
std::vector<KI_POLY_POINT> cornerslist;
|
||||
KI_POLYGON_WITH_HOLES_SET all_contours;
|
||||
KI_POLYGON poly_tmp;
|
||||
|
||||
// Normalize first contour
|
||||
unsigned ic = 0;
|
||||
while( ic < corners_count )
|
||||
{
|
||||
const CPolyPt& corner = m_CornersList[ic++];
|
||||
raw_polygon.push_back( ClipperLib::IntPoint( corner.x, corner.y ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if( corner.end_contour )
|
||||
break;
|
||||
}
|
||||
ClipperLib::SimplifyPolygon( raw_polygon, normalized_polygons );
|
||||
|
||||
// enter main outline
|
||||
for( unsigned ii = 0; ii < normalized_polygons.size(); ii++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
ClipperLib::Polygon& polygon = normalized_polygons[ii];
|
||||
cornerslist.clear();
|
||||
for( unsigned jj = 0; jj < polygon.size(); jj++ )
|
||||
cornerslist.push_back( KI_POLY_POINT( (int)polygon[jj].X, (int)polygon[jj].Y ) );
|
||||
mainpoly.set( cornerslist.begin(), cornerslist.end() );
|
||||
all_contours.push_back( mainpoly );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// Enter holes
|
||||
while( ic < corners_count )
|
||||
{
|
||||
cornerslist.clear();
|
||||
raw_polygon.clear();
|
||||
normalized_polygons.clear();
|
||||
|
||||
// Normalize current hole and add it to hole list
|
||||
while( ic < corners_count )
|
||||
{
|
||||
const CPolyPt& corner = m_CornersList[ic++];
|
||||
raw_polygon.push_back( ClipperLib::IntPoint( corner.x, corner.y ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if( corner.end_contour )
|
||||
{
|
||||
ClipperLib::SimplifyPolygon( raw_polygon, normalized_polygons );
|
||||
for( unsigned ii = 0; ii < normalized_polygons.size(); ii++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
ClipperLib::Polygon& polygon = normalized_polygons[ii];
|
||||
cornerslist.clear();
|
||||
for( unsigned jj = 0; jj < polygon.size(); jj++ )
|
||||
cornerslist.push_back( KI_POLY_POINT( (int)polygon[jj].X, (int)polygon[jj].Y ) );
|
||||
bpl::set_points( poly_tmp, cornerslist.begin(), cornerslist.end() );
|
||||
polysholes.push_back( poly_tmp );
|
||||
}
|
||||
break;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
all_contours -= polysholes;
|
||||
|
||||
// copy polygon with holes to destination
|
||||
RemoveAllContours();
|
||||
|
||||
#define outlines all_contours
|
||||
|
||||
for( unsigned ii = 0; ii < outlines.size(); ii++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
CPolyLine* polyline = this;
|
||||
if( ii > 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
polyline = new CPolyLine;
|
||||
polyline->ImportSettings( this );
|
||||
aNewPolygonList->push_back( polyline );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
KI_POLYGON_WITH_HOLES& curr_poly = outlines[ii];
|
||||
KI_POLYGON_WITH_HOLES::iterator_type corner = curr_poly.begin();
|
||||
// enter main contour
|
||||
while( corner != curr_poly.end() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
polyline->AppendCorner( corner->x(), corner->y() );
|
||||
corner++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
polyline->CloseLastContour();
|
||||
|
||||
// add holes (set of polygons)
|
||||
KI_POLYGON_WITH_HOLES::iterator_holes_type hole = curr_poly.begin_holes();
|
||||
while( hole != curr_poly.end_holes() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
KI_POLYGON::iterator_type hole_corner = hole->begin();
|
||||
// create area with external contour: Recreate only area edges, NOT holes
|
||||
while( hole_corner != hole->end() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
polyline->AppendCorner( hole_corner->x(), hole_corner->y() );
|
||||
hole_corner++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
polyline->CloseLastContour();
|
||||
hole++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
return outlines.size();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
|
@ -862,10 +562,10 @@ CRect CPolyLine::GetCornerBounds()
|
|||
|
||||
for( unsigned i = 0; i<m_CornersList.size(); i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
r.left = min( r.left, m_CornersList[i].x );
|
||||
r.right = max( r.right, m_CornersList[i].x );
|
||||
r.bottom = min( r.bottom, m_CornersList[i].y );
|
||||
r.top = max( r.top, m_CornersList[i].y );
|
||||
r.left = std::min( r.left, m_CornersList[i].x );
|
||||
r.right = std::max( r.right, m_CornersList[i].x );
|
||||
r.bottom = std::min( r.bottom, m_CornersList[i].y );
|
||||
r.top = std::max( r.top, m_CornersList[i].y );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
return r;
|
||||
|
@ -883,10 +583,10 @@ CRect CPolyLine::GetCornerBounds( int icont )
|
|||
|
||||
for( int i = istart; i<=iend; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
r.left = min( r.left, m_CornersList[i].x );
|
||||
r.right = max( r.right, m_CornersList[i].x );
|
||||
r.bottom = min( r.bottom, m_CornersList[i].y );
|
||||
r.top = max( r.top, m_CornersList[i].y );
|
||||
r.left = std::min( r.left, m_CornersList[i].x );
|
||||
r.right = std::max( r.right, m_CornersList[i].x );
|
||||
r.bottom = std::min( r.bottom, m_CornersList[i].y );
|
||||
r.top = std::max( r.top, m_CornersList[i].y );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
return r;
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
|
|||
|
||||
#include <vector>
|
||||
|
||||
#include <kbool/include/kbool/booleng.h>
|
||||
//#include <kbool/include/kbool/booleng.h>
|
||||
#include <pad_shapes.h>
|
||||
#include <wx/gdicmn.h> // for wxPoint definition
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -210,42 +210,11 @@ public:
|
|||
* Convert a self-intersecting polygon to one (or more) non self-intersecting polygon(s)
|
||||
* @param aNewPolygonList = a std::vector<CPolyLine*> reference where to store new CPolyLine
|
||||
* needed by the normalization
|
||||
* @return the polygon count (always >= 1, becuse there is at lesat one polygon)
|
||||
* @return the polygon count (always >= 1, because there is at least one polygon)
|
||||
* There are new polygons only if the polygon count is > 1
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int NormalizeAreaOutlines( std::vector<CPolyLine*>* aNewPolygonList );
|
||||
|
||||
// KBOOL functions
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Function AddPolygonsToBoolEng
|
||||
* Add a CPolyLine to a kbool engine, preparing a boolean op between polygons
|
||||
* @param aBooleng : pointer on a bool engine (handle a set of polygons)
|
||||
* @param aGroup : group to fill (aGroup = GROUP_A or GROUP_B) operations are made between GROUP_A and GROUP_B
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int AddPolygonsToBoolEng( Bool_Engine* aBooleng, GroupType aGroup );
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Function MakeKboolPoly
|
||||
* fill a kbool engine with a closed polyline contour
|
||||
* @return error: 0 if Ok, 1 if error
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int MakeKboolPoly();
|
||||
|
||||
/**
|
||||
* Function NormalizeWithKbool
|
||||
* Use the Kbool Library to clip contours: if outlines are crossing, the self-crossing polygon
|
||||
* is converted to non self-crossing polygon by adding extra points at the crossing locations
|
||||
* and reordering corners
|
||||
* if more than one outside contour are found, extra CPolyLines will be created
|
||||
* because copper areas have only one outside contour
|
||||
* Therefore, if this results in new CPolyLines, return them as std::vector pa
|
||||
* @param aExtraPolyList: pointer on a std::vector<CPolyLine*> to store extra CPolyLines
|
||||
* (when after normalization, there is more than one polygon with holes)
|
||||
* @return number of contours, or -1 if error
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int NormalizeWithKbool( std::vector<CPolyLine*>* aExtraPolyList );
|
||||
|
||||
// Bezier Support
|
||||
void AppendBezier( int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int x3, int y3 );
|
||||
void AppendBezier( int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int x3, int y3, int x4, int y4 );
|
||||
|
@ -277,7 +246,7 @@ private:
|
|||
// and the len of eacvh segment
|
||||
// for DIAGONAL_FULL, the pitch is twice this value
|
||||
int m_utility; // a flag used in some calculations
|
||||
Bool_Engine* m_Kbool_Poly_Engine; // polygons set in kbool engine data
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
std::vector <CPolyPt> m_CornersList; // array of points for corners
|
||||
std::vector <CSegment> m_HatchLines; // hatch lines showing the polygon area
|
||||
|
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
|
@ -0,0 +1,306 @@
|
|||
/*******************************************************************************
|
||||
* *
|
||||
* Author : Angus Johnson *
|
||||
* Version : 4.8.5 *
|
||||
* Date : 15 July 2012 *
|
||||
* Website : http://www.angusj.com *
|
||||
* Copyright : Angus Johnson 2010-2012 *
|
||||
* *
|
||||
* License: *
|
||||
* Use, modification & distribution is subject to Boost Software License Ver 1. *
|
||||
* http://www.boost.org/LICENSE_1_0.txt *
|
||||
* *
|
||||
* Attributions: *
|
||||
* The code in this library is an extension of Bala Vatti's clipping algorithm: *
|
||||
* "A generic solution to polygon clipping" *
|
||||
* Communications of the ACM, Vol 35, Issue 7 (July 1992) pp 56-63. *
|
||||
* http://portal.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=129906 *
|
||||
* *
|
||||
* Computer graphics and geometric modeling: implementation and algorithms *
|
||||
* By Max K. Agoston *
|
||||
* Springer; 1 edition (January 4, 2005) *
|
||||
* http://books.google.com/books?q=vatti+clipping+agoston *
|
||||
* *
|
||||
* See also: *
|
||||
* "Polygon Offsetting by Computing Winding Numbers" *
|
||||
* Paper no. DETC2005-85513 pp. 565-575 *
|
||||
* ASME 2005 International Design Engineering Technical Conferences *
|
||||
* and Computers and Information in Engineering Conference (IDETC/CIE2005) *
|
||||
* September 24–28, 2005 , Long Beach, California, USA *
|
||||
* http://www.me.berkeley.edu/~mcmains/pubs/DAC05OffsetPolygon.pdf *
|
||||
* *
|
||||
*******************************************************************************/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef clipper_hpp
|
||||
#define clipper_hpp
|
||||
|
||||
#include <vector>
|
||||
#include <stdexcept>
|
||||
#include <cstring>
|
||||
#include <cstdlib>
|
||||
#include <ostream>
|
||||
|
||||
namespace ClipperLib {
|
||||
|
||||
enum ClipType { ctIntersection, ctUnion, ctDifference, ctXor };
|
||||
enum PolyType { ptSubject, ptClip };
|
||||
//By far the most widely used winding rules for polygon filling are
|
||||
//EvenOdd & NonZero (GDI, GDI+, XLib, OpenGL, Cairo, AGG, Quartz, SVG, Gr32)
|
||||
//Others rules include Positive, Negative and ABS_GTR_EQ_TWO (only in OpenGL)
|
||||
//see http://glprogramming.com/red/chapter11.html
|
||||
enum PolyFillType { pftEvenOdd, pftNonZero, pftPositive, pftNegative };
|
||||
|
||||
typedef signed long long long64;
|
||||
typedef unsigned long long ulong64;
|
||||
|
||||
struct IntPoint {
|
||||
public:
|
||||
long64 X;
|
||||
long64 Y;
|
||||
IntPoint(long64 x = 0, long64 y = 0): X(x), Y(y) {};
|
||||
friend std::ostream& operator <<(std::ostream &s, IntPoint &p);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
typedef std::vector< IntPoint > Polygon;
|
||||
typedef std::vector< Polygon > Polygons;
|
||||
|
||||
std::ostream& operator <<(std::ostream &s, Polygon &p);
|
||||
std::ostream& operator <<(std::ostream &s, Polygons &p);
|
||||
|
||||
struct ExPolygon {
|
||||
Polygon outer;
|
||||
Polygons holes;
|
||||
};
|
||||
typedef std::vector< ExPolygon > ExPolygons;
|
||||
|
||||
enum JoinType { jtSquare, jtRound, jtMiter };
|
||||
|
||||
bool Orientation(const Polygon &poly);
|
||||
double Area(const Polygon &poly);
|
||||
void OffsetPolygons(const Polygons &in_polys, Polygons &out_polys,
|
||||
double delta, JoinType jointype = jtSquare, double MiterLimit = 2);
|
||||
void SimplifyPolygon(const Polygon &in_poly, Polygons &out_polys);
|
||||
void SimplifyPolygons(const Polygons &in_polys, Polygons &out_polys);
|
||||
void SimplifyPolygons(Polygons &polys);
|
||||
|
||||
void ReversePoints(Polygon& p);
|
||||
void ReversePoints(Polygons& p);
|
||||
|
||||
//used internally ...
|
||||
enum EdgeSide { esNeither = 0, esLeft = 1, esRight = 2, esBoth = 3 };
|
||||
enum IntersectProtects { ipNone = 0, ipLeft = 1, ipRight = 2, ipBoth = 3 };
|
||||
|
||||
struct TEdge {
|
||||
long64 xbot;
|
||||
long64 ybot;
|
||||
long64 xcurr;
|
||||
long64 ycurr;
|
||||
long64 xtop;
|
||||
long64 ytop;
|
||||
double dx;
|
||||
long64 tmpX;
|
||||
PolyType polyType;
|
||||
EdgeSide side;
|
||||
int windDelta; //1 or -1 depending on winding direction
|
||||
int windCnt;
|
||||
int windCnt2; //winding count of the opposite polytype
|
||||
int outIdx;
|
||||
TEdge *next;
|
||||
TEdge *prev;
|
||||
TEdge *nextInLML;
|
||||
TEdge *nextInAEL;
|
||||
TEdge *prevInAEL;
|
||||
TEdge *nextInSEL;
|
||||
TEdge *prevInSEL;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
struct IntersectNode {
|
||||
TEdge *edge1;
|
||||
TEdge *edge2;
|
||||
IntPoint pt;
|
||||
IntersectNode *next;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
struct LocalMinima {
|
||||
long64 Y;
|
||||
TEdge *leftBound;
|
||||
TEdge *rightBound;
|
||||
LocalMinima *next;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
struct Scanbeam {
|
||||
long64 Y;
|
||||
Scanbeam *next;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
struct OutPt; //forward declaration
|
||||
|
||||
struct OutRec {
|
||||
int idx;
|
||||
bool isHole;
|
||||
OutRec *FirstLeft;
|
||||
OutRec *AppendLink;
|
||||
OutPt *pts;
|
||||
OutPt *bottomPt;
|
||||
OutPt *bottomFlag;
|
||||
EdgeSide sides;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
struct OutPt {
|
||||
int idx;
|
||||
IntPoint pt;
|
||||
OutPt *next;
|
||||
OutPt *prev;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
struct JoinRec {
|
||||
IntPoint pt1a;
|
||||
IntPoint pt1b;
|
||||
int poly1Idx;
|
||||
IntPoint pt2a;
|
||||
IntPoint pt2b;
|
||||
int poly2Idx;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
struct HorzJoinRec {
|
||||
TEdge *edge;
|
||||
int savedIdx;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
struct IntRect { long64 left; long64 top; long64 right; long64 bottom; };
|
||||
|
||||
typedef std::vector < OutRec* > PolyOutList;
|
||||
typedef std::vector < TEdge* > EdgeList;
|
||||
typedef std::vector < JoinRec* > JoinList;
|
||||
typedef std::vector < HorzJoinRec* > HorzJoinList;
|
||||
|
||||
//ClipperBase is the ancestor to the Clipper class. It should not be
|
||||
//instantiated directly. This class simply abstracts the conversion of sets of
|
||||
//polygon coordinates into edge objects that are stored in a LocalMinima list.
|
||||
class ClipperBase
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
ClipperBase();
|
||||
virtual ~ClipperBase();
|
||||
bool AddPolygon(const Polygon &pg, PolyType polyType);
|
||||
bool AddPolygons( const Polygons &ppg, PolyType polyType);
|
||||
virtual void Clear();
|
||||
IntRect GetBounds();
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
void DisposeLocalMinimaList();
|
||||
TEdge* AddBoundsToLML(TEdge *e);
|
||||
void PopLocalMinima();
|
||||
virtual void Reset();
|
||||
void InsertLocalMinima(LocalMinima *newLm);
|
||||
LocalMinima *m_CurrentLM;
|
||||
LocalMinima *m_MinimaList;
|
||||
bool m_UseFullRange;
|
||||
EdgeList m_edges;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
class Clipper : public virtual ClipperBase
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
Clipper();
|
||||
~Clipper();
|
||||
bool Execute(ClipType clipType,
|
||||
Polygons &solution,
|
||||
PolyFillType subjFillType = pftEvenOdd,
|
||||
PolyFillType clipFillType = pftEvenOdd);
|
||||
bool Execute(ClipType clipType,
|
||||
ExPolygons &solution,
|
||||
PolyFillType subjFillType = pftEvenOdd,
|
||||
PolyFillType clipFillType = pftEvenOdd);
|
||||
void Clear();
|
||||
bool ReverseSolution() {return m_ReverseOutput;};
|
||||
void ReverseSolution(bool value) {m_ReverseOutput = value;};
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
void Reset();
|
||||
virtual bool ExecuteInternal(bool fixHoleLinkages);
|
||||
private:
|
||||
PolyOutList m_PolyOuts;
|
||||
JoinList m_Joins;
|
||||
HorzJoinList m_HorizJoins;
|
||||
ClipType m_ClipType;
|
||||
Scanbeam *m_Scanbeam;
|
||||
TEdge *m_ActiveEdges;
|
||||
TEdge *m_SortedEdges;
|
||||
IntersectNode *m_IntersectNodes;
|
||||
bool m_ExecuteLocked;
|
||||
PolyFillType m_ClipFillType;
|
||||
PolyFillType m_SubjFillType;
|
||||
bool m_ReverseOutput;
|
||||
void DisposeScanbeamList();
|
||||
void SetWindingCount(TEdge& edge);
|
||||
bool IsEvenOddFillType(const TEdge& edge) const;
|
||||
bool IsEvenOddAltFillType(const TEdge& edge) const;
|
||||
void InsertScanbeam(const long64 Y);
|
||||
long64 PopScanbeam();
|
||||
void InsertLocalMinimaIntoAEL(const long64 botY);
|
||||
void InsertEdgeIntoAEL(TEdge *edge);
|
||||
void AddEdgeToSEL(TEdge *edge);
|
||||
void CopyAELToSEL();
|
||||
void DeleteFromSEL(TEdge *e);
|
||||
void DeleteFromAEL(TEdge *e);
|
||||
void UpdateEdgeIntoAEL(TEdge *&e);
|
||||
void SwapPositionsInSEL(TEdge *edge1, TEdge *edge2);
|
||||
bool IsContributing(const TEdge& edge) const;
|
||||
bool IsTopHorz(const long64 XPos);
|
||||
void SwapPositionsInAEL(TEdge *edge1, TEdge *edge2);
|
||||
void DoMaxima(TEdge *e, long64 topY);
|
||||
void ProcessHorizontals();
|
||||
void ProcessHorizontal(TEdge *horzEdge);
|
||||
void AddLocalMaxPoly(TEdge *e1, TEdge *e2, const IntPoint &pt);
|
||||
void AddLocalMinPoly(TEdge *e1, TEdge *e2, const IntPoint &pt);
|
||||
void AppendPolygon(TEdge *e1, TEdge *e2);
|
||||
void DoEdge1(TEdge *edge1, TEdge *edge2, const IntPoint &pt);
|
||||
void DoEdge2(TEdge *edge1, TEdge *edge2, const IntPoint &pt);
|
||||
void DoBothEdges(TEdge *edge1, TEdge *edge2, const IntPoint &pt);
|
||||
void IntersectEdges(TEdge *e1, TEdge *e2,
|
||||
const IntPoint &pt, IntersectProtects protects);
|
||||
OutRec* CreateOutRec();
|
||||
void AddOutPt(TEdge *e, const IntPoint &pt);
|
||||
void DisposeBottomPt(OutRec &outRec);
|
||||
void DisposeAllPolyPts();
|
||||
void DisposeOutRec(PolyOutList::size_type index);
|
||||
bool ProcessIntersections(const long64 botY, const long64 topY);
|
||||
void AddIntersectNode(TEdge *e1, TEdge *e2, const IntPoint &pt);
|
||||
void BuildIntersectList(const long64 botY, const long64 topY);
|
||||
void ProcessIntersectList();
|
||||
void ProcessEdgesAtTopOfScanbeam(const long64 topY);
|
||||
void BuildResult(Polygons& polys);
|
||||
void BuildResultEx(ExPolygons& polys);
|
||||
void SetHoleState(TEdge *e, OutRec *OutRec);
|
||||
void DisposeIntersectNodes();
|
||||
bool FixupIntersections();
|
||||
void FixupOutPolygon(OutRec &outRec);
|
||||
bool IsHole(TEdge *e);
|
||||
void FixHoleLinkage(OutRec *outRec);
|
||||
void CheckHoleLinkages1(OutRec *outRec1, OutRec *outRec2);
|
||||
void CheckHoleLinkages2(OutRec *outRec1, OutRec *outRec2);
|
||||
void AddJoin(TEdge *e1, TEdge *e2, int e1OutIdx = -1, int e2OutIdx = -1);
|
||||
void ClearJoins();
|
||||
void AddHorzJoin(TEdge *e, int idx);
|
||||
void ClearHorzJoins();
|
||||
void JoinCommonEdges(bool fixHoleLinkages);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
class clipperException : public std::exception
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
clipperException(const char* description): m_descr(description) {}
|
||||
virtual ~clipperException() throw() {}
|
||||
virtual const char* what() const throw() {return m_descr.c_str();}
|
||||
private:
|
||||
std::string m_descr;
|
||||
};
|
||||
//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||||
|
||||
} //ClipperLib namespace
|
||||
|
||||
#endif //clipper_hpp
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
|
|||
project(kbool)
|
||||
|
||||
subdirs(src)
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
|
@ -1,407 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file _dl_itr.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: _dl_itr.h,v 1.6 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
//! author="Klaas Holwerda"
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Definitions of classes, for list implementation
|
||||
* template list and iterator for any list node type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef _DL_Iter_H
|
||||
#define _DL_Iter_H
|
||||
|
||||
#define _CRT_SECURE_CPP_OVERLOAD_STANDARD_NAMES 1
|
||||
#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_DEPRECATE 1
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include <stdlib.h>
|
||||
#include <string>
|
||||
|
||||
using namespace std;
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef _STATUS_ENUM
|
||||
#define _STATUS_ENUM
|
||||
//!<enum Error codes for List and iterator class
|
||||
enum Lerror {
|
||||
NO_MES, /*!<No Message will be generated */
|
||||
NO_LIST, /*!<List is not attached to the iterator*/
|
||||
NO_LIST_OTHER, /*!<no attached list on other iter*/
|
||||
AC_ITER_LIST_OTHER, /*!<iter not allowed on other list */
|
||||
SAME_LIST, /*!<same list not allowed*/
|
||||
NOT_SAME_LIST, /*!<must be same list*/
|
||||
ITER_GT_1, /*!<more then one iteriter at root*/
|
||||
ITER_GT_0, /*!<iter not allowed*/
|
||||
ITER_HITROOT, /*!<iter at root*/
|
||||
NO_ITEM, /*!<no item at current*/
|
||||
NO_NEXT, /*!<no next after current*/
|
||||
NO_PREV, /*!<no prev before current */
|
||||
EMPTY, /*!<list is empty*/
|
||||
NOT_ALLOW, /*!<not allowed*/
|
||||
ITER_NEG /*!<to much iters deleted*/
|
||||
};
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#define SWAP(x,y,t)((t)=(x),(x)=(y),(y)=(t))
|
||||
#define RT _list->_root
|
||||
#define HD _list->_root->_next
|
||||
#define TL _list->_root->_prev
|
||||
#define NB _list->_nbitems
|
||||
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_List;
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_Iter;
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_SortIter;
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class DL_Node
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_Node
|
||||
{
|
||||
friend class DL_List<Dtype>;
|
||||
friend class DL_Iter<Dtype>;
|
||||
friend class DL_SortIter<Dtype>;
|
||||
|
||||
//!Public members
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Template constructor no contents
|
||||
//!Construct a node for a list object
|
||||
DL_Node();
|
||||
|
||||
//!constructor with init of Dtype
|
||||
DL_Node( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Destructor
|
||||
~DL_Node();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Public members
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!data in node
|
||||
Dtype _item;
|
||||
|
||||
//!pointer to next node
|
||||
DL_Node* _next;
|
||||
|
||||
//!pointer to previous node
|
||||
DL_Node* _prev;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//!Template class DL_List
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_List
|
||||
{
|
||||
friend class DL_Iter<Dtype>;
|
||||
friend class DL_SortIter<Dtype>;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Constructor
|
||||
//!Construct a list object
|
||||
//!!tcarg class | Dtype | list object
|
||||
DL_List();
|
||||
|
||||
//!destructor
|
||||
~DL_List();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Report off List Errors
|
||||
void Error( string function, Lerror a_error );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Number of items in the list
|
||||
int count();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Empty List?
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert the object given at the end of the list, after tail
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insend( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert the object given at the begin of the list, before head
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insbegin( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!remove the object at the begin of the list (head)
|
||||
void removehead();
|
||||
|
||||
//! remove the object at the end of the list (tail)
|
||||
void removetail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!remove all objects from the list
|
||||
void remove_all( bool deleteObject = false );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Get the item at the head of the list
|
||||
Dtype headitem();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Get the item at the tail of the list
|
||||
Dtype tailitem();
|
||||
|
||||
//! to move all objects in a list to this list.
|
||||
void takeover( DL_List<Dtype>* otherlist );
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!the root node pointer of the list, the first and last node
|
||||
//! in the list are connected to the root node. The root node is used
|
||||
//! to detect the end / beginning of the list while traversing it.
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* _root;
|
||||
|
||||
//!the number of items in the list, if empty list it is 0
|
||||
int _nbitems;
|
||||
|
||||
//!number of iterators on the list, Attaching or instantiating an iterator to list,
|
||||
//! will increment this member, detaching and
|
||||
//! destruction of iterator for a list will decrement this number
|
||||
short int _iterlevel;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class DL_Iter for iterator on DL_List
|
||||
template <class Dtype>
|
||||
class DL_Iter
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Construct an iterator object for a given list of type Dtype
|
||||
DL_Iter( DL_List<Dtype>* newlist );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Constructor of iterator for the same list as another iterator
|
||||
DL_Iter( DL_Iter* otheriter );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Constructor without an attached list
|
||||
DL_Iter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!destructor
|
||||
~DL_Iter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Report off Iterator Errors
|
||||
void Error( string function, Lerror a_error );
|
||||
|
||||
//!This attaches an iterator to a list of a given type.
|
||||
void Attach( DL_List<Dtype>* newlist );
|
||||
|
||||
//!This detaches an iterator from a list
|
||||
void Detach();
|
||||
|
||||
//!execute given function for each item in the list/iterator
|
||||
void foreach_f( void ( *fp ) ( Dtype n ) );
|
||||
|
||||
//! list mutations
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert after tail item
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insend( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert before head item
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insbegin( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert before current iterator position
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insbefore( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert after current iterator position
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insafter( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!to move all objects in a list to the list of the iterator.
|
||||
void takeover( DL_List<Dtype>* otherlist );
|
||||
|
||||
//!to move all objects in a list (using iterator of that list) to the list of the iterator
|
||||
void takeover( DL_Iter* otheriter );
|
||||
|
||||
//! to move maxcount objects in a list (using iterator of that list) to the list of the iterator
|
||||
void takeover( DL_Iter* otheriter, int maxcount );
|
||||
|
||||
//!remove object at current iterator position from the list.
|
||||
void remove();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove head item
|
||||
void removehead();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove tail item
|
||||
void removetail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove all items
|
||||
void remove_all();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/* void foreach_mf(void (Dtype::*mfp)() ); //call Dtype::mfp for each item */
|
||||
|
||||
//!is list empty (contains items or not)?
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is iterator at root node (begin or end)?
|
||||
bool hitroot();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is iterator at head/first node?
|
||||
bool athead();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is iterator at tail/last node?
|
||||
bool attail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is given item member of the list
|
||||
bool has( Dtype otheritem );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Number of items in the list
|
||||
int count();
|
||||
|
||||
/* cursor movements */
|
||||
|
||||
//!go to last item, if list is empty goto hite
|
||||
void totail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!go to first item, if list is empty goto hite
|
||||
void tohead();
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to the root (empty dummy) object in the list.
|
||||
void toroot();
|
||||
|
||||
//! set the iterator position to next object in the list ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void operator++ ( void );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set iterator to next item (pre fix)
|
||||
void operator++ ( int );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list ( can be the root also)(postfix).
|
||||
void operator-- ( void );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list ( can be the root also)(pre fix).
|
||||
void operator-- ( int );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position n objects in the next direction ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void operator>> ( int );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position n objects in the previous direction ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void operator<< ( int );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to next object in the list, if this would be the root object,
|
||||
//!then set the iterator at the head object
|
||||
void next_wrap();
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list, if this would be the root object,
|
||||
//!then set the iterator at the tail object
|
||||
void prev_wrap();
|
||||
|
||||
//!move root in order to make the current node the tail
|
||||
void reset_tail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!move root in order to make the current node the head
|
||||
void reset_head();
|
||||
|
||||
//!put the iterator at the position of the given object in the list.
|
||||
bool toitem( Dtype );
|
||||
|
||||
//!put the iterator at the same position as the given iterator in the list.
|
||||
void toiter( DL_Iter* otheriter );
|
||||
|
||||
//!put the iterator at the position of the given node in the list.
|
||||
bool tonode( DL_Node<Dtype>* );
|
||||
|
||||
//!iterate through all items of the list
|
||||
bool iterate( void );
|
||||
|
||||
//!To get the item at the current iterator position
|
||||
Dtype item();
|
||||
|
||||
//! get node at iterator
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* node();
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with mergesort
|
||||
void mergesort( int ( *fcmp ) ( Dtype, Dtype ) );
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with cocktailsort
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
\return number of swaps done.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int cocktailsort( int ( * )( Dtype, Dtype ), bool ( * )( Dtype, Dtype ) = NULL );
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with mergesort
|
||||
void mergesort_rec( int ( *fcmp )( Dtype, Dtype ), DL_Node<Dtype> *RT1, int n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with mergesort
|
||||
void mergetwo( int ( *fcmp )( Dtype, Dtype ), DL_Node<Dtype> *RT1, DL_Node<Dtype> *RT2 );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to next object in the list ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void next();
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void prev();
|
||||
|
||||
//!the list for this iterator
|
||||
DL_List<Dtype> *_list;
|
||||
|
||||
//!the current position of the iterator
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype> *_current;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! template class DL_StackIter class for stack iterator on DL_List
|
||||
template <class Dtype>
|
||||
class DL_StackIter : protected DL_Iter<Dtype>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Constructor of stack iterator for given list
|
||||
DL_StackIter( DL_List<Dtype> * );
|
||||
//!Constructor of stack iterator no list attached
|
||||
DL_StackIter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Destructor of stack iterator
|
||||
~DL_StackIter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove all items from the stack
|
||||
void remove_all();
|
||||
//!push given item on the stack
|
||||
void push( Dtype n );
|
||||
//!get last inserted item from stack
|
||||
Dtype pop();
|
||||
//!is stack empty?
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
//!number of items on the stack
|
||||
int count();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//!template class DL_SortIter
|
||||
template <class DType> class DL_SortIter : public DL_Iter<DType>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Constructor of sort iterator for given list and sort function
|
||||
DL_SortIter( DL_List<DType>* nw_list, int ( *new_func )( DType , DType ) );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Constructor of sort iterator with sort function and no list attached
|
||||
DL_SortIter( int ( *newfunc )( DType, DType ) );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Destructor of sort iterator
|
||||
~DL_SortIter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert item in sorted order
|
||||
void insert ( DType new_item );
|
||||
|
||||
/*override following functions to give an error */
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insend ( bool n ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insbegin ( bool n ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insbefore ( bool n ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insafter ( bool n ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void takeover ( DL_List<DType>* ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void takeover ( DL_Iter<DType>* ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void takeover ( DL_Iter<DType>* otheriter, int maxcount ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void next_wrap() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void prev_wrap() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void reset_tail() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void reset_head() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
//!Report off Iterator Errors
|
||||
void sortitererror();
|
||||
|
||||
//!comparefunction used to insert items in sorted order
|
||||
int ( *comparef )( DType, DType );
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/_dl_itr.cpp"
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,257 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file _lnk_itr.cpp
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: _lnk_itr.cpp,v 1.4 2009/02/06 21:33:03 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __UNIX__
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
//=======================================================================
|
||||
// implementation class LinkBaseIter
|
||||
//=======================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::TDLI( DL_List<void*>* newlist ): DL_Iter<void*>( newlist )
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::TDLI( DL_Iter<void*>* otheriter ): DL_Iter<void*>( otheriter )
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::TDLI(): DL_Iter<void*>()
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
// destructor TDLI
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::~TDLI()
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::delete_all()
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Node<void*>* node;
|
||||
Type* obj;
|
||||
for ( int i = 0; i < NB; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
node = HD;
|
||||
HD = node->_next;
|
||||
obj = ( Type* )( node->_item );
|
||||
delete obj;
|
||||
delete node;
|
||||
}
|
||||
NB = 0; //reset memory used (no lost pointers)
|
||||
TL = RT;
|
||||
_current = RT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::foreach_f( void ( *fp ) ( Type* item ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::foreach_f( ( void ( * )( void* ) )fp ); //call fp for each item
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::foreach_mf( void ( Type::*mfp ) () )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
DL_Node<void*>* node = HD; //can be 0 if empty
|
||||
Type* obj;
|
||||
for( int i = 0; i < NB; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
obj = ( Type* )( node->_item );
|
||||
( obj->*mfp )();
|
||||
node = node->_next;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::takeover( DL_List<void*>* otherlist )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::takeover( ( DL_List<void*>* ) otherlist );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::takeover( TDLI* otheriter )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::takeover( ( DL_Iter<void*>* ) otheriter );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::takeover( TDLI* otheriter, int maxcount )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::takeover( ( DL_Iter<void*>* ) otheriter, maxcount );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// is item element of the list?
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLI<Type>::has( Type* otheritem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::has( ( void* ) otheritem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// goto to item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLI<Type>::toitem( Type* item )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::toitem( ( void* ) item );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// get current item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
Type* TDLI<Type>::item()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( Type* ) DL_Iter<void*>::item();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insend( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insend( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbegin( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbegin( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbefore( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbefore( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insafter( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insafter( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insend_unsave( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup = _list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = 0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insend( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbegin_unsave( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup = _list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = 0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbegin( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbefore_unsave( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup = _list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = 0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbefore( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insafter_unsave( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup = _list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = 0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insafter( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::mergesort( int ( *f )( Type* a, Type* b ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::mergesort( ( int ( * )( void*, void* ) ) f );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
int TDLI<Type>::cocktailsort( int ( *f )( Type* a, Type* b ), bool ( *f2 )( Type* c, Type* d ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::cocktailsort( ( int ( * )( void*, void* ) ) f, ( bool( * )( void*, void* ) ) f2 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLISort<Type>::TDLISort( DL_List<void*>* lista, int ( *newfunc )( void*, void* ) )
|
||||
: DL_SortIter<void*>( lista, newfunc )
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLISort<Type>::~TDLISort()
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLISort<Type>::delete_all()
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Node<void*>* node;
|
||||
Type* obj;
|
||||
for ( int i = 0; i < NB; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
node = HD;
|
||||
HD = node->_next;
|
||||
obj = ( Type* )( node->_item );
|
||||
delete obj;
|
||||
delete node;
|
||||
}
|
||||
NB = 0; //reset memory used (no lost pointers)
|
||||
TL = RT;
|
||||
_current = RT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// is item element of the list?
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLISort<Type>::has( Type* otheritem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::has( ( void* ) otheritem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// goto to item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLISort<Type>::toitem( Type* item )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::toitem( ( void* ) item );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// get current item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
Type* TDLISort<Type>::item()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( Type* ) DL_Iter<void*>::item();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLIStack<Type>::TDLIStack( DL_List<void*>* newlist ): DL_StackIter<void*>( newlist )
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
// destructor TDLI
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLIStack<Type>::~TDLIStack()
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
// plaats nieuw item op stack
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLIStack<Type>::push( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_StackIter<void*>::push( ( Type* ) newitem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// haal bovenste item van stack
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
Type* TDLIStack<Type>::pop()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( Type* ) DL_StackIter<void*>::pop();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file _lnk_itr.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: _lnk_itr.h,v 1.4 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
//! author="Klaas Holwerda"
|
||||
//! version="1.0"
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Definitions of classes, for list implementation
|
||||
* template list and iterator for any list node type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
#ifndef _LinkBaseIter_H
|
||||
#define _LinkBaseIter_H
|
||||
|
||||
//! headerfiles="_dl_itr.h stdlib.h misc.h gdsmes.h"
|
||||
#include <stdlib.h>
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#define SWAP(x,y,t)((t)=(x),(x)=(y),(y)=(t))
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/_dl_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
//! codefiles="_dl_itr.cpp"
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class TDLI
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
class for iterator on DL_List<void*> that is type casted version of DL_Iter
|
||||
\sa DL_Iter for further documentation
|
||||
*/
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLI : public DL_Iter<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!constructor
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
\param list to iterate on.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
TDLI( DL_List<void*>* list );
|
||||
|
||||
//!constructor
|
||||
TDLI( DL_Iter<void*>* otheriter );
|
||||
|
||||
//! nolist constructor
|
||||
TDLI();
|
||||
|
||||
//! destructor
|
||||
~TDLI();
|
||||
|
||||
//!call fp for each item
|
||||
void foreach_f( void ( *fp ) ( Type* item ) );
|
||||
|
||||
//!call fp for each item
|
||||
void foreach_mf( void ( Type::*fp ) () );
|
||||
|
||||
/* list mutations */
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! delete all items
|
||||
void delete_all ();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at end
|
||||
void insend ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at begin
|
||||
void insbegin ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert before current
|
||||
void insbefore ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert after current
|
||||
void insafter ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at end unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insend_unsave ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at begin unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insbegin_unsave ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert before iterator position unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insbefore_unsave ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert after iterator position unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insafter_unsave ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::takeover(DL_List< Dtype >* otherlist )
|
||||
void takeover ( DL_List<void*>* otherlist );
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::takeover(DL_Iter* otheriter)
|
||||
void takeover ( TDLI* otheriter );
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::takeover(DL_Iter* otheriter, int maxcount)
|
||||
void takeover ( TDLI* otheriter, int maxcount );
|
||||
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::has
|
||||
bool has ( Type* );
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::toitem
|
||||
bool toitem ( Type* );
|
||||
|
||||
//!get the item then iterator is pointing at
|
||||
Type* item ();
|
||||
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::mergesort
|
||||
void mergesort ( int ( *f )( Type* a, Type* b ) );
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::cocktailsort
|
||||
int cocktailsort( int ( * ) ( Type* a, Type* b ), bool ( * ) ( Type* c, Type* d ) = NULL );
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class TDLIsort
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
// class for sort iterator on DL_List<void*> that is type casted version of DL_SortIter
|
||||
// see also inhereted class DL_SortIter for further documentation
|
||||
*/
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLISort : public DL_SortIter<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//!constructor givin a list and a sort function
|
||||
TDLISort( DL_List<void*>* list, int ( *newfunc )( void*, void* ) );
|
||||
~TDLISort();
|
||||
|
||||
//!delete all items from the list
|
||||
void delete_all();
|
||||
bool has ( Type* );
|
||||
bool toitem ( Type* );
|
||||
Type* item ();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class TDLIStack
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
class for iterator on DL_List<void*> that is type casted version of DL_StackIter
|
||||
see also inhereted class DL_StackIter for further documentation
|
||||
*/
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLIStack : public DL_StackIter<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//constructor givin a list
|
||||
TDLIStack( DL_List<void*>* list );
|
||||
|
||||
~TDLIStack();
|
||||
|
||||
void push( Type* );
|
||||
Type* pop();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#include"kbool/_lnk_itr.cpp"
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,596 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file booleng.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: booleng.h,v 1.9 2009/09/14 18:18:03 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef BOOLENG_H
|
||||
#define BOOLENG_H
|
||||
|
||||
#undef _CRT_SECURE_CPP_OVERLOAD_STANDARD_NAMES
|
||||
#define _CRT_SECURE_CPP_OVERLOAD_STANDARD_NAMES 1
|
||||
#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_DEPRECATE 1
|
||||
|
||||
#include <stdio.h>
|
||||
#include <limits.h>
|
||||
#include <assert.h>
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
#include <string>
|
||||
|
||||
using namespace std;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#if 0 // Kicad does not use kbool in dll version
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__WXMSW__)
|
||||
/*
|
||||
__declspec works in BC++ 5 and later, Watcom C++ 11.0 and later as well
|
||||
as VC++ and gcc
|
||||
*/
|
||||
# if defined(__VISUALC__) || defined(__BORLANDC__) || defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__WATCOMC__)
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT __declspec(dllexport)
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
|
||||
# else /* compiler doesn't support __declspec() */
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT
|
||||
# endif
|
||||
#elif defined(__WXPM__)
|
||||
# if defined (__WATCOMC__)
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT __declspec(dllexport)
|
||||
/*
|
||||
__declspec(dllimport) prepends __imp to imported symbols. We do NOT
|
||||
want that!
|
||||
*/
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT
|
||||
# elif defined(__EMX__)
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT
|
||||
# elif (!(defined(__VISAGECPP__) && (__IBMCPP__ < 400 || __IBMC__ < 400 )))
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT _Export
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT _Export
|
||||
# endif
|
||||
#elif defined(__WXMAC__) || defined(__WXCOCOA__)
|
||||
# ifdef __MWERKS__
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT __declspec(export)
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT __declspec(import)
|
||||
# endif
|
||||
#elif defined(__CYGWIN__)
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT __declspec(dllexport)
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#endif // if 0 for kicad
|
||||
|
||||
/* for other platforms/compilers we don't anything */
|
||||
#ifndef WXEXPORT
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef A2DKBOOLMAKINGDLL
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP WXEXPORT
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_DATA(type) WXEXPORT type
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_CTORFN
|
||||
#elif defined(WXART2D_USINGDLL)
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP WXIMPORT
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_DATA(type) WXIMPORT type
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_CTORFN
|
||||
#else // not making nor using DLL
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_DATA(type) type
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_CTORFN
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#define KBOOL_VERSION "2.1"
|
||||
|
||||
#define KBOOL_DEBUG 0
|
||||
#define KBOOL_LOG 0
|
||||
#define KBOOL_INT64 1
|
||||
|
||||
class kbLink;
|
||||
|
||||
#define LINELENGTH 200
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef MAXDOUBLE
|
||||
#undef MAXDOUBLE
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define MAXDOUBLE 1.7976931348623158e+308
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef KBOOL_INT64
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
|
||||
typedef long long B_INT; // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
//#define MAXB_INT LONG_LONG_MAX
|
||||
//#define MINB_INT LONG_LONG_MIN // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = ( 0x7fffffffffffffffLL ); // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = ( 0x8000000000000000LL );
|
||||
|
||||
#else //defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
|
||||
typedef __int64 B_INT; // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
#undef MAXB_INT
|
||||
#undef MINB_INT
|
||||
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = ( 0x7fffffffffffffff ); // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = ( 0x8000000000000000 );
|
||||
|
||||
#endif //defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
|
||||
#else //KBOOL_INT64
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
typedef long B_INT; // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = ( 0x7fffffffL ); // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = ( 0x80000000L );
|
||||
#else
|
||||
typedef long B_INT; // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = ( 0x7fffffff ); // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = ( 0x80000000 );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#endif //KBOOL_INT64
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT babs( B_INT );
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef M_PI
|
||||
#undef M_PI
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define M_PI (3.1415926535897932384626433832795028841972)
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef M_PI_2
|
||||
#undef M_PI_2
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define M_PI_2 1.57079632679489661923
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef M_PI_4
|
||||
#undef M_PI_4
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define M_PI_4 0.785398163397448309616
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef NULL
|
||||
#define NULL 0
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT bmin( B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2 );
|
||||
B_INT bmax( B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2 );
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT bmin( B_INT value1, B_INT value2 );
|
||||
B_INT bmax( B_INT value1, B_INT value2 );
|
||||
|
||||
#include <string.h>
|
||||
|
||||
//! errors in the boolean algorithm will be thrown using this class
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine_Error
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error( string message, string header = 0, int degree = 9, int fatal = 0 );
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error( const Bool_Engine_Error& a );
|
||||
~Bool_Engine_Error();
|
||||
string GetErrorMessage();
|
||||
string GetHeaderMessage();
|
||||
int GetErrorDegree();
|
||||
int GetFatal();
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
string _message;
|
||||
string _header;
|
||||
int _degree;
|
||||
int _fatal;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#define KBOOL_LOGFILE "kbool.log"
|
||||
|
||||
enum kbEdgeType
|
||||
{
|
||||
KB_OUTSIDE_EDGE, /*!< edge of the outside contour of a polygon */
|
||||
KB_INSIDE_EDGE, /*!< edge of the inside hole a polygon */
|
||||
KB_FALSE_EDGE /*!< edge to connect holes into polygons */
|
||||
} ;
|
||||
|
||||
enum GroupType
|
||||
{
|
||||
GROUP_A, /*!< to set Group A for polygons */
|
||||
GROUP_B /*!< to set Group A for polygons */
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
enum BOOL_OP
|
||||
{
|
||||
BOOL_NON, /*!< No operation */
|
||||
BOOL_OR, /*!< boolean OR operation */
|
||||
BOOL_AND, /*!< boolean AND operation */
|
||||
BOOL_EXOR, /*!< boolean EX_OR operation */
|
||||
BOOL_A_SUB_B, /*!< boolean Group A - Group B operation */
|
||||
BOOL_B_SUB_A, /*!< boolean Group B - Group A operation */
|
||||
BOOL_CORRECTION, /*!< polygon correction/offset operation */
|
||||
BOOL_SMOOTHEN, /*!< smooth operation */
|
||||
BOOL_MAKERING /*!< create a ring on all polygons */
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
class kbGraphList;
|
||||
class kbGraph;
|
||||
class kbLink;
|
||||
class kbNode;
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLI;
|
||||
|
||||
//! boolean engine to perform operation on two sets of polygons.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
First the engine needs to be filled with polygons.
|
||||
The first operand in the operation is called group A polygons, the second group B.
|
||||
The boolean operation ( BOOL_OR, BOOL_AND, BOOL_EXOR, BOOL_A_SUB_B, BOOL_B_SUB_A )
|
||||
are based on the two sets of polygons in group A and B.
|
||||
The other operation on group A only.
|
||||
|
||||
At the end of the operation the resulting polygons can be extracted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//! constructor
|
||||
Bool_Engine();
|
||||
|
||||
//! destructor
|
||||
virtual ~Bool_Engine();
|
||||
|
||||
string GetVersion() { return KBOOL_VERSION; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! reports progress of algorithm.
|
||||
virtual void SetState( string );
|
||||
|
||||
//! called at an internal error.
|
||||
virtual void error( string text, string title );
|
||||
|
||||
//! called at an internal generated possible error.
|
||||
virtual void info( string text, string title );
|
||||
|
||||
bool Do_Operation( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! distance within which points and lines will be snapped towards lines and other points
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The algorithm takes into account gaps and inaccuracies caused by rounding to integer coordinates
|
||||
in the original data.
|
||||
Imagine two rectangles one with a side ( 0,0 ) ( 2.0, 17.0 )
|
||||
and the other has a side ( 0,0 ) ( 1.0, 8.5 )
|
||||
If for some reason those coordinates where round to ( 0,0 ) ( 2, 17 ) ( 0,0 ) ( 1, 9 ),
|
||||
there will be clearly a gap or overlap that was not intended.
|
||||
Even without rounding this effect takes place since there is always a minimum significant bit
|
||||
also when using doubles.
|
||||
|
||||
If the user used as minimum accuracy 0.001, you need to choose Marge > 0.001
|
||||
The boolean engine scales up the input data with GetDGrid() * GetGrid() and rounds the result to
|
||||
integer, So (assuming GRID = 100 DGRID = 1000) a vertex of 123.001 in the user data will
|
||||
become 12300100 internal.
|
||||
At the end of the algorithm the internal vertexes are scaled down again with GetDGrid() * GetGrid(),
|
||||
so 12300103 becomes 123.00103 eventually.
|
||||
So indeed the minimum accuracy might increase, you are free to round again if needed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMarge( double marge );
|
||||
double GetMarge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! input points are scaled up with GetDGrid() * GetGrid()
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Grid makes sure that the integer data used within the algorithm has room for extra intersections
|
||||
smaller than the smallest number within the input data.
|
||||
The input data scaled up with DGrid is related to the accuracy the user has in his input data.
|
||||
Another scaling with Grid is applied on top of it to create space in the integer number for
|
||||
even smaller numbers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetGrid( B_INT grid );
|
||||
|
||||
//! See SetGrid
|
||||
B_INT GetGrid();
|
||||
|
||||
//! input points are scaled up with GetDGrid() * GetGrid()
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The input data scaled up with DGrid is related to the accuracy the user has in his input data.
|
||||
User data with a minimum accuracy of 0.001, means set the DGrid to 1000.
|
||||
The input data may contain data with a minimum accuracy much smaller, but by setting the DGrid
|
||||
everything smaller than 1/DGrid is rounded.
|
||||
|
||||
DGRID is only meant to make fractional parts of input data which can be
|
||||
doubles, part of the integers used in vertexes within the boolean algorithm.
|
||||
And therefore DGRID bigger than 1 is not usefull, you would only loose accuracy.
|
||||
Within the algorithm all input data is multiplied with DGRID, and the result
|
||||
is rounded to an integer.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDGrid( double dgrid );
|
||||
|
||||
//! See SetDGrid
|
||||
double GetDGrid();
|
||||
|
||||
//! When doing a correction operation ( also known as process offset )
|
||||
//! this defines the detail in the rounded corners.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Depending on the round factor the corners of the polygon may be rounding within the correction
|
||||
algorithm. The detail within this rounded corner is set here.
|
||||
It defines the deviation the generated segments in arc like polygon may have towards the ideal
|
||||
rounded corner using a perfect arc.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCorrectionAber( double aber );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetCorrectionAber
|
||||
double GetCorrectionAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! When doing a correction operation ( also known as process offset )
|
||||
//! this defines the amount of correction.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The correction algorithm can apply positive and negative offset to polygons.
|
||||
It takes into account closed in areas within a polygon, caused by overlapping/selfintersecting
|
||||
polygons. So holes form that way are corrected proberly, but the overlapping parts itself
|
||||
are left alone. An often used trick to present polygons with holes by linking to the outside
|
||||
boundary, is therefore also handled properly.
|
||||
The algoritm first does a boolean OR operation on the polygon, and seperates holes and
|
||||
outside contours.
|
||||
After this it creates a ring shapes on the above holes and outside contours.
|
||||
This ring shape is added or subtracted from the holes and outside contours.
|
||||
The result is the corrected polygon.
|
||||
If the correction factor is > 0, the outside contours will become larger, while the hole contours
|
||||
will become smaller.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCorrectionFactor( double aber );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetCorrectionFactor
|
||||
double GetCorrectionFactor();
|
||||
|
||||
//! used within the smooth algorithm to define how much the smoothed curve may deviate
|
||||
//! from the original.
|
||||
void SetSmoothAber( double aber );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetSmoothAber
|
||||
double GetSmoothAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! segments of this size will be left alone in the smooth algorithm.
|
||||
void SetMaxlinemerge( double maxline );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetMaxlinemerge
|
||||
double GetMaxlinemerge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Polygon may be filled in different ways (alternate and winding rule).
|
||||
//! This here defines which method will be assumed within the algorithm.
|
||||
void SetWindingRule( bool rule );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetWindingRule
|
||||
bool GetWindingRule();
|
||||
|
||||
//! when set not only the top vertex of a hole is linked to the other holes and contours,
|
||||
//! but also vertex other vertexes close to a hole can be used.
|
||||
void SetAllowNonTopHoleLinking( bool allow ) { m_allowNonTopHoleLinking = allow; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetWindingRule
|
||||
bool GetAllowNonTopHoleLinking() { return m_allowNonTopHoleLinking; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! the smallest accuracy used within the algorithm for comparing two real numbers.
|
||||
double GetAccur();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Used with in correction/offset algorithm.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
When the polygon contains sharp angles ( < 90 ), after a positive correction the
|
||||
extended parrallel constructed offset lines may leed to extreme offsets on the angles.
|
||||
The length of the crossing generated by the parrallel constructed offset lines
|
||||
towards the original point in the polygon is compared to the offset which needs to be applied.
|
||||
The Roundfactor then decides if this corner will be rounded.
|
||||
A Roundfactor of 1 means that the resulting offset will not be bigger then the correction factor
|
||||
set in the algorithm. Meaning even straight 90 degrees corners will be rounded.
|
||||
A Roundfactor of > sqrt(2) is where 90 corners will be left alone, and smaller corners will be rounded.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRoundfactor( double roundfac );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetRoundfactor
|
||||
double GetRoundfactor();
|
||||
|
||||
// the following are only be used within the algorithm,
|
||||
// since they are scaled with m_DGRID
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
void SetInternalMarge( B_INT marge );
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
B_INT GetInternalMarge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
double GetInternalCorrectionAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
double GetInternalCorrectionFactor();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
double GetInternalSmoothAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
B_INT GetInternalMaxlinemerge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! in this mode polygons add clockwise, or contours,
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
and polygons added counter clockwise or holes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOrientationEntryMode( bool orientationEntryMode ) { m_orientationEntryMode = orientationEntryMode; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetOrientationEntryMode()
|
||||
bool GetOrientationEntryMode() { return m_orientationEntryMode; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! if set true holes are linked into outer contours by double overlapping segments.
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
This mode is needed when the software using the boolean algorithm does
|
||||
not understand hole polygons. In that case a contour and its holes form one
|
||||
polygon. In cases where software understands the concept of holes, contours
|
||||
are clockwise oriented, while holes are anticlockwise oriented.
|
||||
The output of the boolean operations, is following those rules also.
|
||||
But even if extracting the polygons from the engine, each segment is marked such
|
||||
that holes and non holes and linksegments to holes can be recognized.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLinkHoles( bool doLinkHoles ) { m_doLinkHoles = doLinkHoles; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetLinkHoles()
|
||||
bool GetLinkHoles() { return m_doLinkHoles; }
|
||||
|
||||
//!lof file will be created when set True
|
||||
void SetLog( bool OnOff );
|
||||
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log( string);
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log( string, string );
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log( string, double );
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log( string, B_INT );
|
||||
|
||||
FILE* GetLogFile() { return m_logfile; }
|
||||
|
||||
// methods used to add polygons to the eng using points
|
||||
|
||||
//! Start adding a polygon to the engine
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The boolean operation work on two groups of polygons ( group A or B ),
|
||||
other algorithms are only using group A.
|
||||
|
||||
You add polygons like this to the engine.
|
||||
|
||||
// foreach point in a polygon ...
|
||||
if (booleng->StartPolygonAdd(GROUP_A))
|
||||
{
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(100,100);
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(-100,100);
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(-100,-100);
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(100,-100);
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
|
||||
\param A_or_B defines if the new polygon will be of group A or B
|
||||
|
||||
Holes or added by adding an inside polygons with opposite orientation compared
|
||||
to another polygon added.
|
||||
So the contour polygon ClockWise, then add counterclockwise polygons for holes, and visa versa.
|
||||
BUT only if m_orientationEntryMode is set true, else all polygons are redirected, and become
|
||||
individual areas without holes.
|
||||
Holes in such a case must be linked into the contour using two extra segments.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool StartPolygonAdd( GroupType A_or_B );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonAdd
|
||||
bool AddPoint( double x, double y );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonAdd
|
||||
bool EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
|
||||
// methods used to extract polygons from the eng by getting its points
|
||||
|
||||
//! Use after StartPolygonGet()
|
||||
int GetNumPointsInPolygon() { return m_numPtsInPolygon ; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! get resulting polygons at end of an operation
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
// foreach resultant polygon in the booleng ...
|
||||
while ( booleng->StartPolygonGet() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// foreach point in the polygon
|
||||
while ( booleng->PolygonHasMorePoints() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fprintf(stdout,"x = %f\t", booleng->GetPolygonXPoint());
|
||||
fprintf(stdout,"y = %f\n", booleng->GetPolygonYPoint());
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool StartPolygonGet();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
This iterates through the first graph in the graphlist.
|
||||
Setting the current kbNode properly by following the links in the graph
|
||||
through its nodes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool PolygonHasMorePoints();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet
|
||||
double GetPolygonXPoint();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet
|
||||
double GetPolygonYPoint();
|
||||
|
||||
//! in the resulting polygons this tells if the current polygon segment is one
|
||||
//! used to link holes into the outer contour of the surrounding polygon
|
||||
bool GetHoleConnectionSegment();
|
||||
|
||||
//! in the resulting polygons this tells if the current polygon segment is part
|
||||
//! of a hole within a polygon.
|
||||
bool GetHoleSegment();
|
||||
|
||||
//! an other way to get the type of segment.
|
||||
kbEdgeType GetPolygonPointEdgeType();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet()
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
Removes a graph from the graphlist.
|
||||
Called after an extraction of an output polygon was done.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
bool m_doLog;
|
||||
|
||||
//! contains polygons in graph form
|
||||
kbGraphList* m_graphlist;
|
||||
|
||||
double m_MARGE;
|
||||
B_INT m_GRID;
|
||||
double m_DGRID;
|
||||
double m_CORRECTIONABER;
|
||||
double m_CORRECTIONFACTOR;
|
||||
double m_SMOOTHABER;
|
||||
double m_MAXLINEMERGE;
|
||||
bool m_WINDINGRULE;
|
||||
double m_ACCUR;
|
||||
double m_ROUNDFACTOR;
|
||||
|
||||
bool m_orientationEntryMode;
|
||||
|
||||
bool m_doLinkHoles;
|
||||
bool m_allowNonTopHoleLinking;
|
||||
|
||||
//! used in the StartPolygonAdd, AddPt, EndPolygonAdd sequence
|
||||
kbGraph* m_GraphToAdd;
|
||||
//! used in the StartPolygonAdd, AddPt, EndPolygonAdd sequence
|
||||
kbNode* m_lastNodeToAdd;
|
||||
//! used in the StartPolygonAdd, AddPt, EndPolygonAdd sequence
|
||||
kbNode* m_firstNodeToAdd;
|
||||
|
||||
//! the current group type ( group A or B )
|
||||
GroupType m_groupType;
|
||||
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
kbGraph* m_getGraph;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
kbLink* m_getLink;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
kbNode* m_getNode;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
double m_PolygonXPoint;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
double m_PolygonYPoint;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
int m_numPtsInPolygon;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
int m_numNodesVisited;
|
||||
|
||||
FILE* m_logfile;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//! use in kbNode to iterate links.
|
||||
TDLI<kbLink>* _linkiter;
|
||||
|
||||
//! how many time run intersections fase.
|
||||
unsigned int m_intersectionruns;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file graph.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: graph.h,v 1.5 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* @@(#) $Source: /cvsroot/wxart2d/wxArt2D/thirdparty/kbool/include/kbool/graph.h,v $ $Revision: 1.5 $ $Date: 2009/09/10 17:04:09 $ */
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Program GRAPH.H
|
||||
Purpose Used to Intercect and other process functions
|
||||
Last Update 03-04-1996
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef GRAPH_H
|
||||
#define GRAPH_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/scanbeam.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class kbNode;
|
||||
|
||||
class kbGraphList;
|
||||
|
||||
//! one graph containing links that cab be connected.
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP kbGraph
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
kbGraph( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
kbGraph( kbLink*, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
kbGraph( kbGraph* other );
|
||||
|
||||
~kbGraph();
|
||||
|
||||
bool GetBin() { return _bin; };
|
||||
void SetBin( bool b ) { _bin = b; };
|
||||
|
||||
void Prepare( int intersectionruns );
|
||||
void RoundInt( B_INT grid );
|
||||
void Rotate( bool plus90 );
|
||||
|
||||
//! adds a link to the linklist
|
||||
void AddLink( kbNode *begin, kbNode *end );
|
||||
|
||||
//! adds a link to the linklist
|
||||
void AddLink( kbLink *a_link );
|
||||
|
||||
bool AreZeroLines( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Delete parallel lines
|
||||
void DeleteDoubles();
|
||||
|
||||
//! delete zerolines
|
||||
bool DeleteZeroLines( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
bool RemoveNullLinks();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Process found intersections
|
||||
void ProcessCrossings();
|
||||
//! set flags for operations based on group
|
||||
void Set_Operation_Flags();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Left Right values
|
||||
void Remove_IN_Links();
|
||||
|
||||
//! reset bin and mark flags in links.
|
||||
void ResetBinMark();
|
||||
|
||||
// Remove unused links
|
||||
void ReverseAllLinks();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Simplify the kbGraph
|
||||
bool Simplify( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! Takes over all links of the argument
|
||||
bool Smoothen( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
void TakeOver( kbGraph* );
|
||||
|
||||
//! function for maximum performance
|
||||
|
||||
//! Get the First link from the kbGraph
|
||||
kbLink* GetFirstLink();
|
||||
kbNode* GetTopNode();
|
||||
void SetBeenHere( bool );
|
||||
void Reset_flags();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Set the group of a kbGraph
|
||||
void SetGroup( GroupType );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Set the number of the kbGraph
|
||||
void SetNumber( int );
|
||||
void Reset_Mark_and_Bin();
|
||||
bool GetBeenHere();
|
||||
int GetGraphNum();
|
||||
int GetNumberOfLinks();
|
||||
|
||||
void Boolean( BOOL_OP operation, kbGraphList* Result );
|
||||
void Correction( kbGraphList* Result, double factor );
|
||||
void MakeRing( kbGraphList* Result, double factor );
|
||||
void CreateRing( kbGraphList *ring, double factor );
|
||||
void CreateRing_fast( kbGraphList *ring, double factor );
|
||||
void CreateArc( kbNode* center, kbLine* incoming, kbNode* end, double radius, double aber );
|
||||
void CreateArc( kbNode* center, kbNode* begin, kbNode* end, double radius, bool clock, double aber );
|
||||
void MakeOneDirection();
|
||||
void Make_Rounded_Shape( kbLink* a_link, double factor );
|
||||
bool MakeClockWise();
|
||||
bool writegraph( bool linked );
|
||||
bool writeintersections();
|
||||
void WriteKEY( Bool_Engine* GC, FILE* file = NULL );
|
||||
void WriteGraphKEY( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
//! Extracts partical polygons from the graph
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Links are sorted in XY at beginpoint. Bin and mark flag are reset.
|
||||
Next start to collect subparts from the graph, setting the links bin for all found parts.
|
||||
The parts are searched starting at a topleft corner NON set bin flag link.
|
||||
Found parts are numbered, to be easily split into to real sperate graphs by Split()
|
||||
|
||||
\param operation operation to collect for.
|
||||
\param detecthole if you want holes detected, influences also way of extraction.
|
||||
\param foundholes when holes are found this flag is set true, but only if detecthole is set true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Extract_Simples( BOOL_OP operation, bool detecthole, bool& foundholes );
|
||||
|
||||
//! split graph into small graph, using the numbers in links.
|
||||
void Split( kbGraphList* partlist );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Collect a graph by starting at argument link
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Called from Extract_Simples, and assumes sorted links with bin flag unset for non extarted piece
|
||||
|
||||
Collect graphs pieces from a total graph, by following links set to a given boolean operation.
|
||||
\param current_node start node to collect
|
||||
\param operation operation to collect for.
|
||||
\param detecthole if you want holes detected, influences also way of extraction.
|
||||
\param graphnumber number to be given to links in the extracted graph piece
|
||||
\param foundholes when holes are found this flag is set true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void CollectGraph( kbNode *current_node, BOOL_OP operation, bool detecthole, int graphnumber, bool& foundholes );
|
||||
|
||||
void CollectGraphLast( kbNode *current_node, BOOL_OP operation, bool detecthole, int graphnumber, bool& foundholes );
|
||||
|
||||
//! find a link not bin in the top left corner ( links should be sorted already )
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
Last found position is used to find it quickly.
|
||||
Used in ExtractSimples()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
kbNode* GetMostTopLeft( TDLI<kbLink>* _LI );
|
||||
|
||||
//! calculates crossing for all links in a graph, and add those as part of the graph.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
It is not just crossings calculation, snapping close nodes is part of it.
|
||||
This is not done at maximum stability in economic time.
|
||||
There are faster ways, but hardly ever they solve the problems, and they do not snap.
|
||||
Here it is on purpose split into separate steps, to get a better result in snapping, and
|
||||
to reach a better stability.
|
||||
|
||||
\param Marge nodes and lines closer to eachother then this, are merged.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CalculateCrossings( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! equal nodes in position are merged into one.
|
||||
int Merge_NodeToNode( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! basic scan algorithm with a sweeping beam are line.
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
\param scantype a different face in the algorithm.
|
||||
\param holes to detect hole when needed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int ScanGraph2( SCANTYPE scantype, bool& holes );
|
||||
|
||||
//! links not used for a certain operation can be deleted, simplifying extraction
|
||||
void DeleteNonCond( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! links not used for a certain operation can be set bin, simplifying extraction
|
||||
void HandleNonCond( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! debug
|
||||
bool checksort();
|
||||
|
||||
//! used in correction/offset algorithm
|
||||
bool Small( B_INT howsmall );
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bool _bin;
|
||||
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* _linklist;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,65 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file graphlst.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: graphlst.h,v 1.4 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* @@(#) $Source: /cvsroot/wxart2d/wxArt2D/thirdparty/kbool/include/kbool/graphlst.h,v $ $Revision: 1.4 $ $Date: 2009/09/10 17:04:09 $ */
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Program GRAPHLST.H
|
||||
Purpose Implements a list of graphs (header)
|
||||
Last Update 11-03-1996
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef GRAPHLIST_H
|
||||
#define GRAPHLIST_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/graph.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class Debug_driver;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP kbGraphList: public DL_List<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
kbGraphList( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
kbGraphList( kbGraphList* other );
|
||||
|
||||
~kbGraphList();
|
||||
|
||||
void MakeOneGraph( kbGraph *total );
|
||||
|
||||
void Prepare( kbGraph *total );
|
||||
void MakeRings();
|
||||
void Correction();
|
||||
|
||||
void Simplify( double marge );
|
||||
void Smoothen( double marge );
|
||||
void Merge();
|
||||
void Boolean( BOOL_OP operation, int intersectionRunsMax );
|
||||
|
||||
void WriteGraphs();
|
||||
void WriteGraphsKEY( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
void Renumber();
|
||||
void UnMarkAll();
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
|
|||
#ifndef __A2D_KBOOLMOD_H__
|
||||
#define __A2D_KBOOLMOD_H__
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graphlst.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/lpoint.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/record.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/scanbeam.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file line.h
|
||||
\brief Mainy used for calculating crossings
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: line.h,v 1.5 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef LINE_H
|
||||
#define LINE_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine;
|
||||
|
||||
// Status of a point to a line
|
||||
enum PointStatus {LEFT_SIDE, RIGHT_SIDE, ON_AREA, IN_AREA};
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP kbGraph;
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP kbLine
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* m_GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
// constructors and destructor
|
||||
kbLine( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
kbLine( kbLink*, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
~kbLine();
|
||||
|
||||
void Set( kbLink * );
|
||||
kbLink* GetLink();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Get the beginnode from a line
|
||||
kbNode* GetBeginNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Get the endnode from a line
|
||||
kbNode* GetEndNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Check if two lines intersects
|
||||
int CheckIntersect( kbLine*, double Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Intersects two lines
|
||||
int Intersect( kbLine*, double Marge );
|
||||
int Intersect_simple( kbLine * lijn );
|
||||
bool Intersect2( kbNode* crossing, kbLine * lijn );
|
||||
|
||||
//!For an infinite line
|
||||
PointStatus PointOnLine( kbNode* a_node, double& Distance, double Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//!For a non-infinite line
|
||||
PointStatus PointInLine( kbNode* a_node, double& Distance, double Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Caclulate Y if X is known
|
||||
B_INT Calculate_Y( B_INT X );
|
||||
B_INT Calculate_Y_from_X( B_INT X );
|
||||
void Virtual_Point( kbLPoint *a_point, double distance );
|
||||
|
||||
//! assignment operator
|
||||
kbLine& operator=( const kbLine& );
|
||||
|
||||
kbNode* OffsetContour( kbLine* const nextline, kbNode* last_ins, double factor, kbGraph *shape );
|
||||
kbNode* OffsetContour_rounded( kbLine* const nextline, kbNode* _last_ins, double factor, kbGraph *shape );
|
||||
bool OkeForContour( kbLine* const nextline, double factor, kbNode* LastLeft, kbNode* LastRight, LinkStatus& _outproduct );
|
||||
bool Create_Ring_Shape( kbLine* nextline, kbNode** _last_ins_left, kbNode** _last_ins_right, double factor, kbGraph *shape );
|
||||
void Create_Begin_Shape( kbLine* nextline, kbNode** _last_ins_left, kbNode** _last_ins_right, double factor, kbGraph *shape );
|
||||
void Create_End_Shape( kbLine* nextline, kbNode* _last_ins_left, kbNode* _last_ins_right, double factor, kbGraph *shape );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Calculate the parameters if nessecary
|
||||
void CalculateLineParameters();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Adds a crossing between the intersecting lines
|
||||
void AddLineCrossing( B_INT , B_INT , kbLine * );
|
||||
|
||||
void AddCrossing( kbNode *a_node );
|
||||
kbNode* AddCrossing( B_INT X, B_INT Y );
|
||||
bool ProcessCrossings( TDLI<kbLink>* _LI );
|
||||
|
||||
// Linecrosslist
|
||||
void SortLineCrossings();
|
||||
bool CrossListEmpty();
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* GetCrossList();
|
||||
// bool HasInCrossList(kbNode*);
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
//! Function needed for Intersect
|
||||
int ActionOnTable1( PointStatus, PointStatus );
|
||||
//! Function needed for Intersect
|
||||
int ActionOnTable2( PointStatus, PointStatus );
|
||||
|
||||
double m_AA;
|
||||
double m_BB;
|
||||
double m_CC;
|
||||
kbLink* m_link;
|
||||
bool m_valid_parameters;
|
||||
|
||||
//! List with crossings through this link
|
||||
DL_List<void*> *linecrosslist;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,230 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file link.h
|
||||
\brief Part of a graph, connection between nodes (Header)
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda or Julian Smart
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: link.h,v 1.5 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef LINK_H
|
||||
#define LINK_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
enum LinkStatus {IS_LEFT, IS_ON, IS_RIGHT};
|
||||
|
||||
class kbLPoint;
|
||||
class kbNode;
|
||||
class kbRecord;
|
||||
|
||||
//! segment within a graph
|
||||
/*
|
||||
A Graph contains a list of kbLink, the kbLink or connected by Node's.
|
||||
Several kbLink can be connected to one Node.
|
||||
A kbLink has a direction defined by its begin and end node.
|
||||
Node do have a list of connected kbLink's.
|
||||
So one can walk trough a graph in two ways:
|
||||
1- via its kbLink list
|
||||
2- via the node connected to the kbLink's
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP kbLink
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//! contructors
|
||||
kbLink( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
//! contructors
|
||||
kbLink( int graphnr, kbNode* begin, kbNode* end, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
//! contructors
|
||||
kbLink( kbNode *begin, kbNode *end, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
//! destructors
|
||||
~kbLink();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! Merges the other node with argument
|
||||
void MergeNodes( kbNode* const );
|
||||
|
||||
//! outproduct of two links
|
||||
LinkStatus OutProduct( kbLink* const two, double accur );
|
||||
|
||||
//! link three compared to this and two
|
||||
LinkStatus PointOnCorner( kbLink* const, kbLink* const );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Removes argument from the link
|
||||
void Remove( kbNode* );
|
||||
|
||||
//! replaces olddone in the link by newnode
|
||||
void Replace( kbNode* oldnode, kbNode* newnode );
|
||||
|
||||
//!top hole marking
|
||||
void SetTopHole( bool value );
|
||||
|
||||
//!top hole marking
|
||||
bool IsTopHole();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
void UnMark();
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
void Mark();
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
void SetMark( bool );
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
bool IsMarked();
|
||||
|
||||
//! holelink Marking functions
|
||||
void SetHoleLink( bool val ){ m_holelink = val;};
|
||||
|
||||
//! holelink Marking functions
|
||||
bool GetHoleLink(){ return m_holelink;};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Bin functions
|
||||
void SetNotBeenHere();
|
||||
//! Bin functions
|
||||
void SetBeenHere();
|
||||
//! Have you been here ??
|
||||
bool BeenHere();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Removes all the references to this
|
||||
void UnLink();
|
||||
|
||||
//! functions for maximum performance
|
||||
kbNode* GetBeginNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Datamember access functions
|
||||
kbNode* GetEndNode();
|
||||
kbNode* GetLowNode();
|
||||
kbNode* GetHighNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Returns a next link beginning with argument
|
||||
kbLink* Forth( kbNode* );
|
||||
|
||||
int GetGraphNum();
|
||||
bool GetInc();
|
||||
bool GetLeftA();
|
||||
bool GetLeftB();
|
||||
bool GetRightA();
|
||||
bool GetRightB();
|
||||
void GetLRO( kbLPoint*, int&, int&, double );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Return a node not equal to arg.
|
||||
kbNode* GetOther( const kbNode* const );
|
||||
//! Is this link unused ?
|
||||
bool IsUnused();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Used for given operation ?
|
||||
bool IsMarked( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! return true if Left side is marked true for operation
|
||||
bool IsMarkedLeft( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! return true if Right side is marked true for operation
|
||||
bool IsMarkedRight( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! is this a hole link for given operation
|
||||
bool IsHole( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! set the hole mark
|
||||
void SetHole( bool );
|
||||
|
||||
//! is the hole mark set?
|
||||
bool GetHole();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Are the nodes on about the same coordinates ?
|
||||
bool IsZero( B_INT marge );
|
||||
bool ShorterThan( B_INT marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Resets the link
|
||||
void Reset( kbNode* begin, kbNode* end, int graphnr = 0 );
|
||||
void Set( kbNode* begin, kbNode* end );
|
||||
void SetBeginNode( kbNode* );
|
||||
void SetEndNode( kbNode* );
|
||||
void SetGraphNum( int );
|
||||
void SetInc( bool );
|
||||
void SetLeftA( bool );
|
||||
void SetLeftB( bool );
|
||||
void SetRightA( bool );
|
||||
void SetRightB( bool );
|
||||
void SetGroup( GroupType );
|
||||
GroupType Group();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Flag calculation (internal only)
|
||||
void SetLineTypes();
|
||||
void Reset();
|
||||
void Reset_flags();
|
||||
|
||||
//!put in this direction
|
||||
void Redirect( kbNode* a_node );
|
||||
|
||||
void TakeOverOperationFlags( kbLink* link );
|
||||
|
||||
void SetRecordNode( DL_Node<kbRecord*>* recordNode ) { m_record = recordNode; }
|
||||
|
||||
DL_Node<kbRecord*>* GetRecordNode() { return m_record; }
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
//! The mainitems of a link
|
||||
kbNode *m_beginnode, *m_endnode;
|
||||
//! Marker for walking over the graph
|
||||
bool m_bin : 1;
|
||||
//! Is this a part of hole ?
|
||||
bool m_hole : 1;
|
||||
//! link that is toplink of hole?
|
||||
bool m_hole_top : 1;
|
||||
//! going in one more time in this graph if true else going out one time
|
||||
bool m_Inc : 1;
|
||||
//! Is left in polygongroup A
|
||||
bool m_LeftA : 1;
|
||||
//! Is right in polygon group A
|
||||
bool m_RightA : 1;
|
||||
//! Is left in polygon group B
|
||||
bool m_LeftB : 1;
|
||||
//! Is right in polygongroup B
|
||||
bool m_RightB : 1;
|
||||
//! General purose marker, internally unused
|
||||
bool m_mark : 1;
|
||||
//! link for linking holes
|
||||
bool m_holelink : 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! Marker for Merge Left
|
||||
bool m_merge_L : 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract a-b Left
|
||||
bool m_a_substract_b_L: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract b-a Left
|
||||
bool m_b_substract_a_L: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for intersect Left
|
||||
bool m_intersect_L: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for X-OR Left
|
||||
bool m_exor_L: 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! Marker for Merge Right
|
||||
bool m_merge_R : 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract a-b Right
|
||||
bool m_a_substract_b_R: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract b-a Right
|
||||
bool m_b_substract_a_R: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for intersect Right
|
||||
bool m_intersect_R: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for X-OR Right
|
||||
bool m_exor_R: 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! belongs to group A or B
|
||||
GroupType m_group : 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! belongs to this polygon part in the graph.
|
||||
int m_graphnum;
|
||||
|
||||
DL_Node<kbRecord*>* m_record;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,60 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file lpoint.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: lpoint.h,v 1.4 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* @@(#) $Source: /cvsroot/wxart2d/wxArt2D/thirdparty/kbool/include/kbool/lpoint.h,v $ $Revision: 1.4 $ $Date: 2009/09/10 17:04:09 $ */
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Program LPOINT.H
|
||||
Purpose Definition of GDSII pointtype structure
|
||||
Last Update 12-12-1995
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef LPOINT_H
|
||||
#define LPOINT_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP kbLPoint
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
kbLPoint();
|
||||
kbLPoint( B_INT const , B_INT const );
|
||||
kbLPoint( kbLPoint* const );
|
||||
|
||||
void Set( const B_INT, const B_INT );
|
||||
void Set( const kbLPoint & );
|
||||
|
||||
kbLPoint GetPoint();
|
||||
B_INT GetX();
|
||||
B_INT GetY();
|
||||
void SetX( B_INT );
|
||||
void SetY( B_INT );
|
||||
bool Equal( const kbLPoint a_point, B_INT Marge );
|
||||
bool Equal( const B_INT, const B_INT , B_INT Marge );
|
||||
bool ShorterThan( const kbLPoint a_point, B_INT marge );
|
||||
bool ShorterThan( const B_INT X, const B_INT Y, B_INT );
|
||||
|
||||
kbLPoint &operator=( const kbLPoint & );
|
||||
kbLPoint &operator+( const kbLPoint & );
|
||||
kbLPoint &operator-( const kbLPoint & );
|
||||
|
||||
kbLPoint &operator*( int );
|
||||
kbLPoint &operator/( int );
|
||||
|
||||
int operator==( const kbLPoint & ) const;
|
||||
int operator!=( const kbLPoint & ) const;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
B_INT _x;
|
||||
B_INT _y;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file node.h
|
||||
\brief Holds a GDSII node structure (Header)
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: node.h,v 1.7 2009/09/14 16:50:12 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef NODE_H
|
||||
#define NODE_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/lpoint.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h" // LinkBaseIter
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
|
||||
enum NodePosition { N_LEFT, N_ON, N_RIGHT};
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP kbNode : public kbLPoint
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
// friend must be deleted in the final version!
|
||||
friend class Debug_driver;
|
||||
|
||||
// constructors and destructors
|
||||
kbNode( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
kbNode( const B_INT, const B_INT, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
kbNode( kbLPoint* const a_point, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
kbNode( kbNode * const, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
kbNode& operator=( const kbNode &other_node );
|
||||
~kbNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//public member functions
|
||||
void AddLink( kbLink* );
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* GetLinklist();
|
||||
|
||||
//! check two link for its operation flags to be the same when coming from the prev link.
|
||||
bool SameSides( kbLink* const prev , kbLink* const link, BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! get the link most right or left to the current link, but with the specific operation
|
||||
/*! flags the same on the sides of the new link.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
kbLink* GetMost( kbLink* const prev , LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! get link that is leading to a hole ( hole segment or linking segment )
|
||||
kbLink* GetMostHole( kbLink* const prev , LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP operation,
|
||||
bool searchholelink = true );
|
||||
|
||||
//! get link that is not vertical.
|
||||
kbLink* GetNotFlat();
|
||||
|
||||
//! get a link to a hole or from a hole.
|
||||
kbLink* GetHoleLink( kbLink* const prev, LinkStatus whatside,
|
||||
bool checkbin, BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
int Merge( kbNode* );
|
||||
void RemoveLink( kbLink* );
|
||||
bool Simplify( kbNode* First, kbNode* Second, B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
// memberfunctions for maximum performance
|
||||
void RoundInt( B_INT grid );
|
||||
kbLink* GetIncomingLink();
|
||||
|
||||
int GetNumberOfLinks();
|
||||
kbLink* GetNextLink();
|
||||
kbLink* GetOtherLink( kbLink* );
|
||||
kbLink* GetOutgoingLink();
|
||||
kbLink* GetPrevLink();
|
||||
|
||||
kbLink* Follow( kbLink* const prev );
|
||||
kbLink* GetBinHighest( bool binset );
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* _linklist;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file record.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: record.h,v 1.5 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef RECORD_H
|
||||
#define RECORD_H
|
||||
|
||||
class kbNode;
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
|
||||
enum BEAM_TYPE { NORMAL, FLAT};
|
||||
|
||||
enum DIRECTION {GO_LEFT, GO_RIGHT};
|
||||
|
||||
//extern void DeleteRecordPool();
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine;
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP kbRecord
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
// void deletepool();
|
||||
|
||||
kbRecord( kbLink* link, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
~kbRecord();
|
||||
|
||||
// void* operator new(size_t size);
|
||||
|
||||
// void operator delete(void* recordptr);
|
||||
|
||||
void SetNewLink( kbLink* link );
|
||||
|
||||
void Set_Flags();
|
||||
|
||||
void Calc_Ysp( kbNode* low );
|
||||
|
||||
kbLink* GetLink();
|
||||
|
||||
kbLine* GetLine();
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT Ysp();
|
||||
|
||||
void SetYsp( B_INT ysp );
|
||||
|
||||
DIRECTION Direction();
|
||||
|
||||
bool Calc_Left_Right( kbRecord* record_above_me );
|
||||
|
||||
bool Equal( kbRecord* );
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
kbLine _line;
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT _ysp;
|
||||
|
||||
//! going left are right in beam
|
||||
DIRECTION _dir;
|
||||
|
||||
//! how far in group_a
|
||||
int _a;
|
||||
|
||||
//! how far in group_b
|
||||
int _b;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,58 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file scanbeam.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: scanbeam.h,v 1.6 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef SCANBEAM_H
|
||||
#define SCANBEAM_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/record.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
|
||||
enum SCANTYPE{NODELINK, LINKLINK, GENLR, LINKHOLES, INOUT};
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(WXART2D_USINGDLL)
|
||||
template class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP DL_Iter<kbRecord*>;
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP ScanBeam : public DL_List<kbRecord*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
ScanBeam( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
~ScanBeam();
|
||||
void SetType( kbNode* low, kbNode* high );
|
||||
|
||||
bool FindNew( SCANTYPE scantype, TDLI<kbLink>* _I, bool& holes );
|
||||
bool RemoveOld( SCANTYPE scantype, TDLI<kbLink>* _I, bool& holes );
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
bool ProcessHoles( bool atinsert, TDLI<kbLink>* _LI );
|
||||
int Process_LinkToLink_Crossings(); // find crossings
|
||||
int Process_PointToLink_Crossings();
|
||||
int Process_LinkToLink_Flat( kbLine* flatline );
|
||||
void SortTheBeam( bool backangle );
|
||||
bool checksort();
|
||||
bool writebeam();
|
||||
void Calc_Ysp();
|
||||
//int FindCloseLinksAndCross(TDLI<kbLink>* _I,kbNode* _lowf);
|
||||
void Generate_INOUT( int graphnumber );
|
||||
|
||||
kbNode* _low;
|
||||
DL_Iter<kbRecord*> _BI;
|
||||
int lastinserted;
|
||||
BEAM_TYPE _type;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,54 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file statusb.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: statusb.h,v 1.3 2009/02/06 21:33:03 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* @@(#) $Source: /cvsroot/wxart2d/wxArt2D/thirdparty/kbool/include/kbool/statusb.h,v $ $Revision: 1.3 $ $Date: 2009/02/06 21:33:03 $ */
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Program STATUSB.H
|
||||
Purpose Controls the statusbar of the application (header)
|
||||
This statusbar is a typical Windows statusbar
|
||||
For porting to another platform there must be a StatusBar class
|
||||
derived from this.
|
||||
User interface element (See documentation for more details
|
||||
about the functions needed in this class)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef STATUSB_H
|
||||
#define STATUSB_H
|
||||
#include <time.h>
|
||||
|
||||
// abstract base class for own statusbar inherite from it
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP StatusBar
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
// constructor & destructor
|
||||
StatusBar(){};
|
||||
~StatusBar(){};
|
||||
|
||||
virtual void SetXY( double = 0.0, double = 0.0 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void ResetCoord() = 0;
|
||||
virtual void SetFile( char* = 0 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void SetProcess( char* = 0 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void SetTime( time_t seconds = 0 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void SetRecording( int status = 0 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void SetZoom( float factor = 1 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void Reset() = 0;
|
||||
void StartDTimer();
|
||||
void EndDTimer();
|
||||
int GetDTimerOn();
|
||||
time_t GetDTimer();
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
int timer;
|
||||
time_t oldtime;
|
||||
time_t curtime;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,9 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file valuesvc.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: valuesvc.h,v 1.2 2009/02/06 21:33:03 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
|
@ -1,7 +0,0 @@
|
|||
Boolean: GDSII viewer/editor + (boolean) operations on sets of 2d polygons.
|
||||
Boolean Web Site:
|
||||
http://boolean.klaasholwerda.nl/bool.html
|
||||
|
||||
kbool is also used in wxArt2D
|
||||
see www.wxart2d.org
|
||||
the last version of kbool can be found on this site.
|
|
@ -1,684 +0,0 @@
|
|||
The kbool library is dual licensed.
|
||||
The GPL applies for open source, but for commercial use it is proprietary.
|
||||
Contact copyright holder for more information on other licensing schemes.
|
||||
|
||||
Software library is provided "AS IS" without warranty of any kind, conform point 16 and 17 down here.
|
||||
|
||||
Next a copy of the GPL license text.
|
||||
|
||||
==========================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
|
||||
Version 3, 29 June 2007
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
|
||||
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
|
||||
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
|
||||
|
||||
Preamble
|
||||
|
||||
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for
|
||||
software and other kinds of works.
|
||||
|
||||
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed
|
||||
to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast,
|
||||
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
|
||||
share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free
|
||||
software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the
|
||||
GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to
|
||||
any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to
|
||||
your programs, too.
|
||||
|
||||
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
|
||||
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
|
||||
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
|
||||
them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
|
||||
want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
|
||||
free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
|
||||
|
||||
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
|
||||
these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have
|
||||
certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if
|
||||
you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
|
||||
gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
|
||||
freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive
|
||||
or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they
|
||||
know their rights.
|
||||
|
||||
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
|
||||
(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
|
||||
giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
|
||||
|
||||
For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains
|
||||
that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and
|
||||
authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
|
||||
changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to
|
||||
authors of previous versions.
|
||||
|
||||
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
|
||||
modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer
|
||||
can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of
|
||||
protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic
|
||||
pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to
|
||||
use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we
|
||||
have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those
|
||||
products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we
|
||||
stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions
|
||||
of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
|
||||
States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
|
||||
software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to
|
||||
avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
|
||||
make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that
|
||||
patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
|
||||
|
||||
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
|
||||
modification follow.
|
||||
|
||||
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
|
||||
|
||||
0. Definitions.
|
||||
|
||||
"This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
|
||||
|
||||
"Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of
|
||||
works, such as semiconductor masks.
|
||||
|
||||
"The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
|
||||
License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and
|
||||
"recipients" may be individuals or organizations.
|
||||
|
||||
To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work
|
||||
in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an
|
||||
exact copy. The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the
|
||||
earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.
|
||||
|
||||
A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based
|
||||
on the Program.
|
||||
|
||||
To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without
|
||||
permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
|
||||
infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a
|
||||
computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying,
|
||||
distribution (with or without modification), making available to the
|
||||
public, and in some countries other activities as well.
|
||||
|
||||
To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
|
||||
parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through
|
||||
a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
|
||||
|
||||
An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices"
|
||||
to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
|
||||
feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
|
||||
tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
|
||||
extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the
|
||||
work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If
|
||||
the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a
|
||||
menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
|
||||
|
||||
1. Source Code.
|
||||
|
||||
The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work
|
||||
for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source
|
||||
form of a work.
|
||||
|
||||
A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official
|
||||
standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of
|
||||
interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that
|
||||
is widely used among developers working in that language.
|
||||
|
||||
The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other
|
||||
than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of
|
||||
packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major
|
||||
Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that
|
||||
Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an
|
||||
implementation is available to the public in source code form. A
|
||||
"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component
|
||||
(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system
|
||||
(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to
|
||||
produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
|
||||
|
||||
The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all
|
||||
the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable
|
||||
work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to
|
||||
control those activities. However, it does not include the work's
|
||||
System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free
|
||||
programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but
|
||||
which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source
|
||||
includes interface definition files associated with source files for
|
||||
the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically
|
||||
linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require,
|
||||
such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those
|
||||
subprograms and other parts of the work.
|
||||
|
||||
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users
|
||||
can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
|
||||
Source.
|
||||
|
||||
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
|
||||
same work.
|
||||
|
||||
2. Basic Permissions.
|
||||
|
||||
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
|
||||
copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
|
||||
conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
|
||||
permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a
|
||||
covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its
|
||||
content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your
|
||||
rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
|
||||
|
||||
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
|
||||
convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains
|
||||
in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose
|
||||
of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you
|
||||
with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with
|
||||
the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do
|
||||
not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works
|
||||
for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction
|
||||
and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of
|
||||
your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
|
||||
|
||||
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
|
||||
the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10
|
||||
makes it unnecessary.
|
||||
|
||||
3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
|
||||
|
||||
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
|
||||
measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article
|
||||
11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or
|
||||
similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such
|
||||
measures.
|
||||
|
||||
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
|
||||
circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention
|
||||
is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to
|
||||
the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or
|
||||
modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's
|
||||
users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of
|
||||
technological measures.
|
||||
|
||||
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
|
||||
|
||||
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
|
||||
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
|
||||
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
|
||||
keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
|
||||
non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code;
|
||||
keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all
|
||||
recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
|
||||
|
||||
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
|
||||
and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
|
||||
|
||||
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
|
||||
|
||||
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
|
||||
produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the
|
||||
terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
|
||||
|
||||
a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified
|
||||
it, and giving a relevant date.
|
||||
|
||||
b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is
|
||||
released under this License and any conditions added under section
|
||||
7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to
|
||||
"keep intact all notices".
|
||||
|
||||
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this
|
||||
License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This
|
||||
License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7
|
||||
additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts,
|
||||
regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no
|
||||
permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not
|
||||
invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
|
||||
|
||||
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
|
||||
Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
|
||||
interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your
|
||||
work need not make them do so.
|
||||
|
||||
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
|
||||
works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work,
|
||||
and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program,
|
||||
in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an
|
||||
"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not
|
||||
used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users
|
||||
beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work
|
||||
in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other
|
||||
parts of the aggregate.
|
||||
|
||||
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
|
||||
|
||||
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
|
||||
of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
|
||||
machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License,
|
||||
in one of these ways:
|
||||
|
||||
a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
|
||||
(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
|
||||
Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
|
||||
customarily used for software interchange.
|
||||
|
||||
b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
|
||||
(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
|
||||
written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as
|
||||
long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
|
||||
model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a
|
||||
copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the
|
||||
product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical
|
||||
medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no
|
||||
more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this
|
||||
conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the
|
||||
Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
|
||||
|
||||
c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the
|
||||
written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This
|
||||
alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and
|
||||
only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord
|
||||
with subsection 6b.
|
||||
|
||||
d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
|
||||
place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the
|
||||
Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no
|
||||
further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the
|
||||
Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to
|
||||
copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source
|
||||
may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party)
|
||||
that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain
|
||||
clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the
|
||||
Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the
|
||||
Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is
|
||||
available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
|
||||
|
||||
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided
|
||||
you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding
|
||||
Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no
|
||||
charge under subsection 6d.
|
||||
|
||||
A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded
|
||||
from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be
|
||||
included in conveying the object code work.
|
||||
|
||||
A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any
|
||||
tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family,
|
||||
or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation
|
||||
into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product,
|
||||
doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular
|
||||
product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a
|
||||
typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status
|
||||
of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user
|
||||
actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product
|
||||
is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial
|
||||
commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
|
||||
the only significant mode of use of the product.
|
||||
|
||||
"Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods,
|
||||
procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install
|
||||
and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from
|
||||
a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must
|
||||
suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object
|
||||
code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because
|
||||
modification has been made.
|
||||
|
||||
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or
|
||||
specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as
|
||||
part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the
|
||||
User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a
|
||||
fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the
|
||||
Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied
|
||||
by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply
|
||||
if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install
|
||||
modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has
|
||||
been installed in ROM).
|
||||
|
||||
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a
|
||||
requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates
|
||||
for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for
|
||||
the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a
|
||||
network may be denied when the modification itself materially and
|
||||
adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and
|
||||
protocols for communication across the network.
|
||||
|
||||
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided,
|
||||
in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly
|
||||
documented (and with an implementation available to the public in
|
||||
source code form), and must require no special password or key for
|
||||
unpacking, reading or copying.
|
||||
|
||||
7. Additional Terms.
|
||||
|
||||
"Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this
|
||||
License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.
|
||||
Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall
|
||||
be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent
|
||||
that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions
|
||||
apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately
|
||||
under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by
|
||||
this License without regard to the additional permissions.
|
||||
|
||||
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
|
||||
remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of
|
||||
it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
|
||||
removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place
|
||||
additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
|
||||
for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
|
||||
|
||||
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you
|
||||
add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of
|
||||
that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
|
||||
|
||||
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the
|
||||
terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
|
||||
|
||||
b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or
|
||||
author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal
|
||||
Notices displayed by works containing it; or
|
||||
|
||||
c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or
|
||||
requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
|
||||
reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
|
||||
|
||||
d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or
|
||||
authors of the material; or
|
||||
|
||||
e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
|
||||
trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
|
||||
|
||||
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
|
||||
material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of
|
||||
it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for
|
||||
any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on
|
||||
those licensors and authors.
|
||||
|
||||
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further
|
||||
restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you
|
||||
received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is
|
||||
governed by this License along with a term that is a further
|
||||
restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains
|
||||
a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this
|
||||
License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms
|
||||
of that license document, provided that the further restriction does
|
||||
not survive such relicensing or conveying.
|
||||
|
||||
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
|
||||
must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
|
||||
additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating
|
||||
where to find the applicable terms.
|
||||
|
||||
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the
|
||||
form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
|
||||
the above requirements apply either way.
|
||||
|
||||
8. Termination.
|
||||
|
||||
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
|
||||
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
|
||||
modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
|
||||
this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third
|
||||
paragraph of section 11).
|
||||
|
||||
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
|
||||
license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
|
||||
provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
|
||||
finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright
|
||||
holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means
|
||||
prior to 60 days after the cessation.
|
||||
|
||||
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
|
||||
reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
|
||||
violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
|
||||
received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
|
||||
copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
|
||||
your receipt of the notice.
|
||||
|
||||
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
|
||||
licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
|
||||
this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
|
||||
reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same
|
||||
material under section 10.
|
||||
|
||||
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
|
||||
|
||||
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or
|
||||
run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work
|
||||
occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission
|
||||
to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However,
|
||||
nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or
|
||||
modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do
|
||||
not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a
|
||||
covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
|
||||
|
||||
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
|
||||
|
||||
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
|
||||
receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
|
||||
propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible
|
||||
for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
|
||||
|
||||
An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an
|
||||
organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
|
||||
organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered
|
||||
work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
|
||||
transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
|
||||
licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could
|
||||
give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the
|
||||
Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if
|
||||
the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
|
||||
|
||||
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
|
||||
rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may
|
||||
not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of
|
||||
rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation
|
||||
(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that
|
||||
any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for
|
||||
sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
|
||||
|
||||
11. Patents.
|
||||
|
||||
A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
|
||||
License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The
|
||||
work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
|
||||
|
||||
A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims
|
||||
owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
|
||||
hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted
|
||||
by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version,
|
||||
but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a
|
||||
consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For
|
||||
purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant
|
||||
patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of
|
||||
this License.
|
||||
|
||||
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
|
||||
patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to
|
||||
make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and
|
||||
propagate the contents of its contributor version.
|
||||
|
||||
In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express
|
||||
agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent
|
||||
(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to
|
||||
sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a
|
||||
party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a
|
||||
patent against the party.
|
||||
|
||||
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license,
|
||||
and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone
|
||||
to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a
|
||||
publicly available network server or other readily accessible means,
|
||||
then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so
|
||||
available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the
|
||||
patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner
|
||||
consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent
|
||||
license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have
|
||||
actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the
|
||||
covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work
|
||||
in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
|
||||
country that you have reason to believe are valid.
|
||||
|
||||
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or
|
||||
arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
|
||||
covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties
|
||||
receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify
|
||||
or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license
|
||||
you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered
|
||||
work and works based on it.
|
||||
|
||||
A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within
|
||||
the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
|
||||
conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are
|
||||
specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered
|
||||
work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is
|
||||
in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment
|
||||
to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying
|
||||
the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the
|
||||
parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory
|
||||
patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work
|
||||
conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily
|
||||
for and in connection with specific products or compilations that
|
||||
contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement,
|
||||
or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
|
||||
|
||||
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
|
||||
any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
|
||||
otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
|
||||
|
||||
12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
|
||||
|
||||
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
|
||||
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
|
||||
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a
|
||||
covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
|
||||
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
|
||||
not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you
|
||||
to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey
|
||||
the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this
|
||||
License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
|
||||
|
||||
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
|
||||
|
||||
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have
|
||||
permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
|
||||
under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single
|
||||
combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this
|
||||
License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work,
|
||||
but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License,
|
||||
section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the
|
||||
combination as such.
|
||||
|
||||
14. Revised Versions of this License.
|
||||
|
||||
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of
|
||||
the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
|
||||
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
|
||||
address new problems or concerns.
|
||||
|
||||
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
|
||||
Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
|
||||
Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the
|
||||
option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
|
||||
version or of any later version published by the Free Software
|
||||
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the
|
||||
GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published
|
||||
by the Free Software Foundation.
|
||||
|
||||
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future
|
||||
versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's
|
||||
public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you
|
||||
to choose that version for the Program.
|
||||
|
||||
Later license versions may give you additional or different
|
||||
permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
|
||||
author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a
|
||||
later version.
|
||||
|
||||
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
|
||||
|
||||
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
|
||||
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
|
||||
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
|
||||
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
|
||||
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
|
||||
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
|
||||
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
|
||||
ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
|
||||
|
||||
16. Limitation of Liability.
|
||||
|
||||
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
|
||||
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS
|
||||
THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
|
||||
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
|
||||
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
|
||||
DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
|
||||
PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
|
||||
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
|
||||
SUCH DAMAGES.
|
||||
|
||||
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
|
||||
|
||||
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
|
||||
above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
|
||||
reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates
|
||||
an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
|
||||
Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a
|
||||
copy of the Program in return for a fee.
|
||||
|
||||
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
|
||||
|
||||
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
|
||||
|
||||
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
|
||||
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
|
||||
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
|
||||
|
||||
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
|
||||
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
|
||||
state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
|
||||
the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
|
||||
|
||||
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
|
||||
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
|
||||
|
||||
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
|
||||
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
|
||||
the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
|
||||
(at your option) any later version.
|
||||
|
||||
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
|
||||
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
|
||||
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
|
||||
GNU General Public License for more details.
|
||||
|
||||
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
||||
along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
|
||||
|
||||
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
|
||||
|
||||
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
|
||||
notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
|
||||
|
||||
<program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
|
||||
This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
|
||||
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
|
||||
under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
|
||||
|
||||
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
|
||||
parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands
|
||||
might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box".
|
||||
|
||||
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school,
|
||||
if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
|
||||
For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see
|
||||
<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
|
||||
|
||||
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
|
||||
into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you
|
||||
may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
|
||||
the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
|
||||
Public License instead of this License. But first, please read
|
||||
<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
|
|
@ -1,11 +0,0 @@
|
|||
add_executable(boolonly boolonly.cpp)
|
||||
|
||||
if(WIN32)
|
||||
add_definitions(-D_MSWVC_)
|
||||
else(WIN32)
|
||||
add_definitions(-D__UNIX__)
|
||||
endif(WIN32)
|
||||
|
||||
include_directories(${kbool_SOURCE_DIR}/..)
|
||||
|
||||
target_link_libraries(boolonly kbool)
|
|
@ -1,373 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file samples/boolonly/boolonly.cpp
|
||||
\brief boolonly demonstrates the use of the boolean algorithm
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: boolonly.cpp,v 1.7 2009/05/28 19:49:48 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#include "boolonly.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
|
||||
// Constructors
|
||||
KBoolPoint::KBoolPoint()
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = 0.0;
|
||||
_y = 0.0;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolPoint::KBoolPoint( double const X, double const Y )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = X;
|
||||
_y = Y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double KBoolPoint::GetX()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return _x;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double KBoolPoint::GetY()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return _y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template class TDLI<KBoolPoint>;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void ArmBoolEng( Bool_Engine* booleng )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// set some global vals to arm the boolean engine
|
||||
double DGRID = 1000; // round coordinate X or Y value in calculations to this
|
||||
double MARGE = 0.001; // snap with in this range points to lines in the intersection routines
|
||||
// should always be > DGRID a MARGE >= 10*DGRID is oke
|
||||
// this is also used to remove small segments and to decide when
|
||||
// two segments are in line.
|
||||
double CORRECTIONFACTOR = 500.0; // correct the polygons by this number
|
||||
double CORRECTIONABER = 1.0; // the accuracy for the rounded shapes used in correction
|
||||
double ROUNDFACTOR = 1.5; // when will we round the correction shape to a circle
|
||||
double SMOOTHABER = 10.0; // accuracy when smoothing a polygon
|
||||
double MAXLINEMERGE = 1000.0; // leave as is, segments of this length in smoothen
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// DGRID is only meant to make fractional parts of input data which
|
||||
// are doubles, part of the integers used in vertexes within the boolean algorithm.
|
||||
// Within the algorithm all input data is multiplied with DGRID
|
||||
|
||||
// space for extra intersection inside the boolean algorithms
|
||||
// only change this if there are problems
|
||||
int GRID = 10000;
|
||||
|
||||
booleng->SetMarge( MARGE );
|
||||
booleng->SetGrid( GRID );
|
||||
booleng->SetDGrid( DGRID );
|
||||
booleng->SetCorrectionFactor( CORRECTIONFACTOR );
|
||||
booleng->SetCorrectionAber( CORRECTIONABER );
|
||||
booleng->SetSmoothAber( SMOOTHABER );
|
||||
booleng->SetMaxlinemerge( MAXLINEMERGE );
|
||||
booleng->SetRoundfactor( ROUNDFACTOR );
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void AddPolygonsToBoolEng2( Bool_Engine* booleng )
|
||||
{
|
||||
int x1 = 100;
|
||||
int x2 = 200;
|
||||
int y1 = 100;
|
||||
int y2 = 200;
|
||||
int pitch1 = 200;
|
||||
int numRowsAndCols = 120;
|
||||
int i, j;
|
||||
|
||||
for ( i = 0; i < numRowsAndCols; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
for ( j = 0; j < numRowsAndCols; j++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// foreach point in a polygon ...
|
||||
if ( booleng->StartPolygonAdd( GROUP_A ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// Counter-Clockwise
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( x1, y1 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( x2, y1 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( x2, y2 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( x1, y2 );
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
x1 += pitch1;
|
||||
x2 += pitch1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
x1 = 100;
|
||||
x2 = 200;
|
||||
|
||||
y1 += pitch1;
|
||||
y2 += pitch1;
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
x1 = 150;
|
||||
x2 = 250;
|
||||
y1 = 150;
|
||||
y2 = 250;
|
||||
|
||||
for ( i = 0; i < numRowsAndCols; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
for ( int j = 0; j < numRowsAndCols; j++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// foreach point in a polygon ...
|
||||
if ( booleng->StartPolygonAdd( GROUP_B ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// Counter Clockwise
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( x1, y1 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( x2, y1 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( x2, y2 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( x1, y2 );
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
x1 += pitch1;
|
||||
x2 += pitch1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
x1 = 150;
|
||||
x2 = 250;
|
||||
|
||||
y1 += pitch1;
|
||||
y2 += pitch1;
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void AddPolygonsToBoolEng( Bool_Engine* booleng )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// foreach point in a polygon ...
|
||||
if ( booleng->StartPolygonAdd( GROUP_A ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 28237.480000, 396.364000 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 28237.980000, 394.121000 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 28242.000000, 395.699000 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 28240.830000, 397.679000 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
|
||||
// foreach point in a polygon ...
|
||||
if ( booleng->StartPolygonAdd( GROUP_B ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 28242.100000, 398.491000 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 28240.580000, 397.485000 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 28237.910000, 394.381000 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
|
||||
if ( booleng->StartPolygonAdd( GROUP_B ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 28243.440000, 399.709000 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 28237.910000, 394.381000 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 28239.290000, 394.763000 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void AddPolygonsToBoolEng3( Bool_Engine* booleng )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// foreach point in a polygon ...
|
||||
if ( booleng->StartPolygonAdd( GROUP_A ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 100, 100 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( -100, 100 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( -100, -100 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 100, -100 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
|
||||
// foreach point in a polygon ...
|
||||
if ( booleng->StartPolygonAdd( GROUP_B ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 50, 50 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( -50, 50 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( -50, -50 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 50, -50 );
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void AddPolygonsToBoolEng4( Bool_Engine* booleng )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// foreach point in a polygon ...
|
||||
if ( booleng->StartPolygonAdd( GROUP_A ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 0, 0 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 0, 1000 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 1000, 1000 );
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint( 1000, 0 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void GetPolygonsFromBoolEng( Bool_Engine* booleng )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// foreach resultant polygon in the booleng ...
|
||||
while ( booleng->StartPolygonGet() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// foreach point in the polygon
|
||||
while ( booleng->PolygonHasMorePoints() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fprintf( stderr, "x = %f\t", booleng->GetPolygonXPoint() );
|
||||
fprintf( stderr, "y = %f\n", booleng->GetPolygonYPoint() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void GetPolygonsFromBoolEngKEY( Bool_Engine* booleng )
|
||||
{
|
||||
FILE * file = fopen( "keyfile.key", "w" );
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf( file, "\
|
||||
HEADER 5; \
|
||||
BGNLIB; \
|
||||
LASTMOD {2-11-15 15:39:21}; \
|
||||
LASTACC {2-11-15 15:39:21}; \
|
||||
LIBNAME trial; \
|
||||
UNITS; \
|
||||
USERUNITS 0.0001; PHYSUNITS 2.54e-009; \
|
||||
\
|
||||
BGNSTR; \
|
||||
CREATION {2-11-15 15:39:21}; \
|
||||
LASTMOD {2-11-15 15:39:21}; \
|
||||
STRNAME top; \
|
||||
");
|
||||
// foreach resultant polygon in the booleng ...
|
||||
while ( booleng->StartPolygonGet() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fprintf(file,"BOUNDARY; LAYER 2; DATATYPE 0;\n");
|
||||
fprintf(file," XY % d; \n",booleng->GetNumPointsInPolygon()+1 );
|
||||
|
||||
booleng->PolygonHasMorePoints();
|
||||
double firstx = booleng->GetPolygonXPoint();
|
||||
double firsty = booleng->GetPolygonYPoint();
|
||||
fprintf(file,"X % f;\t", firstx);
|
||||
fprintf(file,"Y % f; \n", firsty);
|
||||
|
||||
// foreach point in the polygon
|
||||
while ( booleng->PolygonHasMorePoints() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fprintf(file,"X % f;\t", booleng->GetPolygonXPoint());
|
||||
fprintf(file,"Y % f; \n", booleng->GetPolygonYPoint());
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
fprintf(file,"X % f;\t", firstx);
|
||||
fprintf(file,"Y % f; \n", firsty);
|
||||
fprintf(file,"ENDEL;\n");
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf(file,"\
|
||||
ENDSTR top; \
|
||||
ENDLIB; \
|
||||
");
|
||||
fclose (file);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
int main()
|
||||
{
|
||||
printf( "------------------------------------------------------\n" );
|
||||
printf( " | Unit test of the KBool Engine | \n" );
|
||||
printf( "------------------------------------------------------\n" );
|
||||
|
||||
float correction;
|
||||
char a = '1';
|
||||
while (a != '0')
|
||||
{
|
||||
Bool_Engine* booleng = new Bool_Engine();
|
||||
ArmBoolEng( booleng );
|
||||
|
||||
AddPolygonsToBoolEng3( booleng );
|
||||
|
||||
printf( "\n***********************************\n" );
|
||||
printf( "*** version: % s \n", booleng->GetVersion().c_str() );
|
||||
printf( "***********************************\n" );
|
||||
printf( "1: OR operation\n" );
|
||||
printf( "2: AND operation\n" );
|
||||
printf( "3: EXOR operation\n" );
|
||||
printf( "4: A subtract B\n" );
|
||||
printf( "5: B subtract A\n" );
|
||||
printf( "6: Correct each polygon with a factor\n" );
|
||||
printf( "7: Smoothen each polygon\n" );
|
||||
printf( "8: Make a ring around each polygon\n" );
|
||||
printf( "9: No operation\n" );
|
||||
printf( "0: Quit\n" );
|
||||
printf( "***********************************\n" );
|
||||
|
||||
printf( "type a number and <return>" );
|
||||
scanf("%c", &a, 1);
|
||||
//scanf( " % c", &a );
|
||||
|
||||
switch (a)
|
||||
{
|
||||
case ('0'):
|
||||
{
|
||||
GetPolygonsFromBoolEng( booleng );
|
||||
break;
|
||||
}
|
||||
case ('1'):
|
||||
booleng->Do_Operation(BOOL_OR);
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case ('2'):
|
||||
booleng->Do_Operation(BOOL_AND);
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case ('3'):
|
||||
booleng->Do_Operation(BOOL_EXOR);
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case ('4'):
|
||||
booleng->Do_Operation(BOOL_A_SUB_B);
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case ('5'):
|
||||
booleng->Do_Operation(BOOL_B_SUB_A);
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case ('6'):
|
||||
printf( "give correction factor ( eg. 100.0 or - 100.0 )<return>: ");
|
||||
scanf(" % f", &correction ); // correct the polygons by this number
|
||||
booleng->SetCorrectionFactor( correction );
|
||||
booleng->Do_Operation(BOOL_CORRECTION);
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case ('7'):
|
||||
booleng->Do_Operation(BOOL_SMOOTHEN);
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case ('8'):
|
||||
printf("give width of ring <return>: ");
|
||||
scanf(" % f", &correction );
|
||||
// create a ring of this size
|
||||
booleng->SetCorrectionFactor( fabs( correction / 2.0) );
|
||||
booleng->Do_Operation(BOOL_MAKERING);
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case ('9'):
|
||||
break;
|
||||
default:
|
||||
break;
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if (a != '0')
|
||||
{
|
||||
printf("\nresulting polygons\n" );
|
||||
|
||||
GetPolygonsFromBoolEng( booleng );
|
||||
|
||||
//OR USE THIS
|
||||
//GetPolygonsFromBoolEngKEY( booleng );
|
||||
|
||||
printf( "\n\ntype a character and <return>");
|
||||
scanf( " % c", &a );
|
||||
}
|
||||
delete booleng;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
return 0;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/samples/boolonly/boolonly.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: boolonly.h,v 1.5 2009/02/06 21:33:03 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class KBoolPoint
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolPoint();
|
||||
KBoolPoint( double const , double const );
|
||||
double GetX();
|
||||
double GetY();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
double _x;
|
||||
double _y;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
|
|||
mondrian ICON "sample.ico"
|
||||
#include "wx/msw/wx.rc"
|
|
@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
|
|||
if(WIN32)
|
||||
add_definitions(-D_MSWVC_)
|
||||
else(WIN32)
|
||||
add_definitions(-D__UNIX__)
|
||||
endif(WIN32)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
include_directories(../include)
|
||||
|
||||
set(KBOOL_SRCS
|
||||
booleng.cpp
|
||||
graph.cpp
|
||||
graphlst.cpp
|
||||
line.cpp
|
||||
link.cpp
|
||||
lpoint.cpp
|
||||
node.cpp
|
||||
record.cpp
|
||||
scanbeam.cpp)
|
||||
|
||||
add_library(kbool STATIC ${KBOOL_SRCS})
|
|
@ -1,585 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file src/booleng.cpp
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: booleng.cpp,v 1.7 2009/09/14 16:50:12 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include <time.h>
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graphlst.h"
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT bmin( B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return( ( value1 < value2 ) ? value1 : value2 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT bmax( B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return( ( value1 > value2 ) ? value1 : value2 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT babs( B_INT a )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( a < 0 ) a = -a;
|
||||
return a;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//-------------------------------------------------------------------/
|
||||
//----------------- Bool_Engine_Error -------------------------------/
|
||||
//-------------------------------------------------------------------/
|
||||
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error::Bool_Engine_Error( string message, string header, int degree, int fatal )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_message = message;
|
||||
_header = header;
|
||||
|
||||
_degree = degree;
|
||||
_fatal = fatal;
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error::Bool_Engine_Error( const Bool_Engine_Error& a )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_message = a._message;
|
||||
_header = a._header;
|
||||
|
||||
_degree = a._degree;
|
||||
_fatal = a._fatal;
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error::~Bool_Engine_Error()
|
||||
{
|
||||
_message = "";
|
||||
_header = "";
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
string Bool_Engine_Error::GetErrorMessage()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return _message;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
string Bool_Engine_Error::GetHeaderMessage()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return _header;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
int Bool_Engine_Error::GetErrorDegree()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return _degree;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
int Bool_Engine_Error::GetFatal()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return _fatal;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//-------------------------------------------------------------------/
|
||||
//----------------- Bool_Engine -------------------------------------/
|
||||
//-------------------------------------------------------------------/
|
||||
|
||||
Bool_Engine::Bool_Engine()
|
||||
{
|
||||
_linkiter = new TDLI<kbLink>();
|
||||
m_intersectionruns = 1;
|
||||
|
||||
m_orientationEntryMode = false;
|
||||
m_doLinkHoles = true;
|
||||
m_allowNonTopHoleLinking = true;
|
||||
|
||||
m_graphlist = new kbGraphList( this );
|
||||
m_ACCUR = 1e-4;
|
||||
m_WINDINGRULE = true;
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd = NULL;
|
||||
m_firstNodeToAdd = NULL;
|
||||
m_lastNodeToAdd = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
m_logfile = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
#if KBOOL_LOG == 1
|
||||
SetLog( true );
|
||||
#else
|
||||
SetLog( false );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Bool_Engine::~Bool_Engine()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
fclose ( m_logfile );
|
||||
|
||||
delete _linkiter;
|
||||
delete m_graphlist;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetLog( bool OnOff )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_doLog = OnOff;
|
||||
if ( m_doLog )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// create a new logfile
|
||||
m_logfile = fopen( KBOOL_LOGFILE, "w" );
|
||||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
fprintf( stderr, "Bool_Engine: Unable to write to Boolean Engine logfile\n" );
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
time_t timer;
|
||||
struct tm * today;
|
||||
timer = time( NULL );
|
||||
today = localtime( &timer );
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "Logfile created on:\t\t\t%s", ctime( &timer ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fclose ( m_logfile );
|
||||
m_logfile = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetState( string process )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Write_Log( process );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::error( string text, string title )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Write_Log( "FATAL ERROR: ", title );
|
||||
Write_Log( "FATAL ERROR: ", text );
|
||||
throw Bool_Engine_Error( " Fatal Error", "Fatal Error", 9, 1 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::info( string text, string title )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Write_Log( "FATAL ERROR: ", title );
|
||||
Write_Log( "FATAL ERROR: ", text );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetMarge( double marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_MARGE = marge;
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_MARGE = %f\n", m_MARGE );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetAccur()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_ACCUR;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetRoundfactor( double roundfac )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_ROUNDFACTOR = roundfac;
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_ROUNDFACTOR = %f\n", m_ROUNDFACTOR );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetRoundfactor()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_ROUNDFACTOR;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetMarge()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_MARGE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetDGrid( double dgrid )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_DGRID = dgrid;
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_DGRID = %f\n", m_DGRID );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetDGrid()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetGrid( B_INT grid )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_GRID = grid;
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_GRID = %lld\n", m_GRID );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT Bool_Engine::GetGrid()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_GRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetCorrectionAber( double aber )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_CORRECTIONABER = aber;
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_CORRECTIONABER = %f\n", m_CORRECTIONABER );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetCorrectionAber()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_CORRECTIONABER;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetCorrectionFactor( double aber )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_CORRECTIONFACTOR = aber;
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_CORRECTIONFACTOR = %f\n", m_CORRECTIONFACTOR );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetCorrectionFactor()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_CORRECTIONFACTOR;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetSmoothAber( double aber )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_SMOOTHABER = aber;
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_SMOOTHABER = %f\n", m_SMOOTHABER );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetSmoothAber()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_SMOOTHABER;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetMaxlinemerge( double maxline )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_MAXLINEMERGE = maxline;
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_MAXLINEMERGE = %f\n", m_MAXLINEMERGE );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetMaxlinemerge()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_MAXLINEMERGE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetWindingRule( bool rule )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_WINDINGRULE = rule;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::GetWindingRule()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_WINDINGRULE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetInternalMarge( B_INT marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_MARGE = ( double )marge / m_GRID / m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT Bool_Engine::GetInternalMarge()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( B_INT ) ( m_MARGE * m_GRID * m_DGRID );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetInternalCorrectionAber()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_CORRECTIONABER * m_GRID * m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetInternalCorrectionFactor()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_CORRECTIONFACTOR * m_GRID * m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetInternalSmoothAber()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_SMOOTHABER * m_GRID * m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT Bool_Engine::GetInternalMaxlinemerge()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( B_INT ) ( m_MAXLINEMERGE * m_GRID * m_DGRID );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
#define TRIALS 30
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::Do_Operation( BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
kbGraphList * saveme = new kbGraphList( m_graphlist );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
try
|
||||
{
|
||||
switch ( operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case ( BOOL_OR ):
|
||||
case ( BOOL_AND ):
|
||||
case ( BOOL_EXOR ):
|
||||
case ( BOOL_A_SUB_B ):
|
||||
case ( BOOL_B_SUB_A ):
|
||||
m_graphlist->Boolean( operation, m_intersectionruns );
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case ( BOOL_CORRECTION ):
|
||||
m_graphlist->Correction();
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case ( BOOL_MAKERING ):
|
||||
m_graphlist->MakeRings();
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case ( BOOL_SMOOTHEN ):
|
||||
m_graphlist->Smoothen( GetInternalSmoothAber() );
|
||||
break;
|
||||
default:
|
||||
{
|
||||
error( "Wrong operation", "Command Error" );
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
catch ( Bool_Engine_Error & error )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
delete m_graphlist;
|
||||
m_graphlist = new kbGraphList( saveme );
|
||||
m_graphlist->WriteGraphsKEY( this );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fclose ( m_logfile );
|
||||
m_logfile = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
info( error.GetErrorMessage(), "error" );
|
||||
throw error;
|
||||
}
|
||||
catch( ... )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
delete m_graphlist;
|
||||
m_graphlist = new kbGraphList( saveme );
|
||||
m_graphlist->WriteGraphsKEY( this );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fclose ( m_logfile );
|
||||
m_logfile = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
info( "Unknown exception", "error" );
|
||||
throw ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
delete saveme;
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::StartPolygonAdd( GroupType A_or_B )
|
||||
{
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "-> StartPolygonAdd(%d)\n", A_or_B );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
if ( m_GraphToAdd != NULL )
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
|
||||
kbGraph *myGraph = new kbGraph( this );
|
||||
m_graphlist->insbegin( myGraph );
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd = myGraph;
|
||||
m_groupType = A_or_B;
|
||||
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::AddPoint( double x, double y )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_GraphToAdd == NULL ){return false;}
|
||||
|
||||
double scaledx = x * m_DGRID * m_GRID;
|
||||
double scaledy = y * m_DGRID * m_GRID;
|
||||
|
||||
if ( scaledx > MAXB_INT || scaledx < MINB_INT )
|
||||
error( "X coordinate of vertex to big", "" );
|
||||
if ( scaledy > MAXB_INT || scaledy < MINB_INT )
|
||||
error( "Y coordinate of vertex to big", "" );
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT rintx = ( ( B_INT ) ( x * m_DGRID ) ) * m_GRID;
|
||||
B_INT rinty = ( ( B_INT ) ( y * m_DGRID ) ) * m_GRID;
|
||||
kbNode *myNode = new kbNode( rintx, rinty, this );
|
||||
|
||||
// adding first point to graph
|
||||
if ( m_firstNodeToAdd == NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "-> AddPt() *FIRST* :" );
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, " input: x = %f, y = %f\n", x, y );
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, " input: x = %I64d, y = %I64d\n", rintx, rinty ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
m_firstNodeToAdd = ( kbNode * ) myNode;
|
||||
m_lastNodeToAdd = ( kbNode * ) myNode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "-> AddPt():" );
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, " input: x = %f, y = %f\n", x, y );
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, " input: x = %I64d, y = %I64d\n", rintx, rinty ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd->AddLink( m_lastNodeToAdd, myNode );
|
||||
m_lastNodeToAdd = ( kbNode * ) myNode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::EndPolygonAdd()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_GraphToAdd == NULL ) {return false;}
|
||||
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd->AddLink( m_lastNodeToAdd, m_firstNodeToAdd );
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd->SetGroup( m_groupType );
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd = NULL;
|
||||
m_lastNodeToAdd = NULL;
|
||||
m_firstNodeToAdd = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::StartPolygonGet()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( !m_graphlist->empty() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_getGraph = ( kbGraph* ) m_graphlist->headitem();
|
||||
m_getLink = m_getGraph->GetFirstLink();
|
||||
m_getNode = m_getLink->GetBeginNode();
|
||||
m_numPtsInPolygon = m_getGraph->GetNumberOfLinks();
|
||||
m_numNodesVisited = 0;
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::PolygonHasMorePoints()
|
||||
{
|
||||
// see if first point
|
||||
if ( m_numNodesVisited == 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// don't need to touch the m_getNode
|
||||
m_numNodesVisited++;
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if ( m_numNodesVisited < m_numPtsInPolygon )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// traverse to the next node
|
||||
m_getNode = m_getLink->GetOther( m_getNode );
|
||||
m_getLink = m_getLink->Forth( m_getNode );
|
||||
|
||||
m_numNodesVisited++;
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::EndPolygonGet()
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_graphlist->removehead();
|
||||
delete m_getGraph;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetPolygonXPoint()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_getNode->GetX() / m_GRID / m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetPolygonYPoint()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_getNode->GetY() / m_GRID / m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::GetHoleSegment()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_getLink->GetHole() )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::GetHoleConnectionSegment()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_getLink->GetHoleLink() )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbEdgeType Bool_Engine::GetPolygonPointEdgeType()
|
||||
{
|
||||
// see if the point is the beginning of a false edge
|
||||
if ( m_getLink->GetHoleLink() )
|
||||
return KB_FALSE_EDGE;
|
||||
else
|
||||
// it's either an outside or inside edge
|
||||
if ( m_getLink->GetHole() )
|
||||
return KB_INSIDE_EDGE;
|
||||
else
|
||||
return KB_OUTSIDE_EDGE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log( string msg1 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "%s \n", msg1.c_str() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log( string msg1, string msg2 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "%s %s\n", msg1.c_str(), msg2.c_str() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log( string fmt, double dval )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, fmt.c_str(), dval );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log( string fmt, B_INT bval )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, fmt.c_str(), bval );
|
||||
}
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
|
@ -1,392 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file src/graphlst.cpp
|
||||
\brief Implements a list of graphs
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: graphlst.cpp,v 1.4 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
//#include "debugdrv.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graphlst.h"
|
||||
|
||||
//extern Debug_driver* _debug_driver;
|
||||
//this here is to initialize the static iterator of graphlist
|
||||
//with NOLIST constructor
|
||||
|
||||
int graphsorterX( kbGraph *, kbGraph * );
|
||||
int graphsorterY( kbGraph *, kbGraph * );
|
||||
|
||||
kbGraphList::kbGraphList( Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbGraphList::kbGraphList( kbGraphList* other )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC = other->_GC;
|
||||
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( other );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
insend( new kbGraph( _LI.item() ) );
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbGraphList::~kbGraphList()
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
//first empty the graph
|
||||
_LI.delete_all();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//prepare the graphlist for the boolean operations
|
||||
//group all graphs into ONE graph
|
||||
void kbGraphList::Prepare( kbGraph* total )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( empty() )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
//round to grid and put in one graph
|
||||
_GC->SetState( "Simplify" );
|
||||
|
||||
// Simplify all graphs in the list
|
||||
Simplify( ( double ) _GC->GetGrid() );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( ! _GC->GetOrientationEntryMode() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->MakeClockWise();
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Renumber();
|
||||
|
||||
//the graplist contents will be transferred to one graph
|
||||
MakeOneGraph( total );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// the function will make from all the graphs in the graphlist one graph,
|
||||
// simply by throwing all the links in one graph, the graphnumbers will
|
||||
// not be changed
|
||||
void kbGraphList::MakeOneGraph( kbGraph* total )
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
total->TakeOver( _LI.item() );
|
||||
delete _LI.item();
|
||||
_LI.remove();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Renumber all the graphs
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbGraphList::Renumber()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetOrientationEntryMode() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( _LI.item()->GetFirstLink()->Group() == GROUP_A )
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetNumber( 1 );
|
||||
else
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetNumber( 2 );
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
unsigned int Number = 1;
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetNumber( Number++ );
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// Simplify the graphs
|
||||
void kbGraphList::Simplify( double marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.foreach_mf( &kbGraph::Reset_Mark_and_Bin );
|
||||
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( _LI.item()->Simplify( ( B_INT ) marge ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( _LI.item()->GetNumberOfLinks() < 3 )
|
||||
// delete this graph from the graphlist
|
||||
{
|
||||
delete _LI.item();
|
||||
_LI.remove();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// Smoothen the graphs
|
||||
void kbGraphList::Smoothen( double marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.foreach_mf( &kbGraph::Reset_Mark_and_Bin );
|
||||
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( _LI.item()->Smoothen( ( B_INT ) marge ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( _LI.item()->GetNumberOfLinks() < 3 )
|
||||
// delete this graph from the graphlist
|
||||
{
|
||||
delete _LI.item();
|
||||
_LI.remove();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// Turn off all markers in all the graphs
|
||||
void kbGraphList::UnMarkAll()
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.foreach_mf( &kbGraph::Reset_Mark_and_Bin );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//==============================================================================
|
||||
//
|
||||
//======================== BOOLEAN FUNCTIONS ===================================
|
||||
//
|
||||
//==============================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
void kbGraphList::Correction()
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
int todo = _LI.count();
|
||||
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetInternalCorrectionFactor() ) //not zero
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
for( int i = 0; i < todo ; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//the input graph will be empty in the end
|
||||
kbGraphList *_correct = new kbGraphList( _GC );
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->MakeClockWise();
|
||||
_LI.item()->Correction( _correct, _GC->GetInternalCorrectionFactor() );
|
||||
|
||||
delete _LI.item();
|
||||
_LI.remove();
|
||||
|
||||
//move corrected graphlist to result
|
||||
while ( !_correct->empty() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//add to end
|
||||
_LI.insend( ( kbGraph* )_correct->headitem() );
|
||||
_correct->removehead();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
delete _correct;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbGraphList::MakeRings()
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
int todo = _LI.count();
|
||||
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
for( int i = 0; i < todo ; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//the input graph will be empty in the end
|
||||
kbGraphList *_ring = new kbGraphList( _GC );
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->MakeClockWise();
|
||||
_LI.item()->MakeRing( _ring, _GC->GetInternalCorrectionFactor() );
|
||||
|
||||
delete _LI.item();
|
||||
_LI.remove();
|
||||
|
||||
//move created rings graphs to this
|
||||
while ( !_ring->empty() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//add to end
|
||||
( ( kbGraph* )_ring->headitem() )->MakeClockWise();
|
||||
_LI.insend( ( kbGraph* )_ring->headitem() );
|
||||
_ring->removehead();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
delete _ring;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//merge the graphs in the list and return the merged result
|
||||
void kbGraphList::Merge()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( count() <= 1 )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetGroup( GROUP_A );
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbGraph* _tomerge = new kbGraph( _GC );
|
||||
|
||||
Renumber();
|
||||
|
||||
//the graplist contents will be transferred to one graph
|
||||
MakeOneGraph( _tomerge );
|
||||
//the original is empty now
|
||||
|
||||
_tomerge->Prepare( 1 );
|
||||
_tomerge->Boolean( BOOL_OR, this );
|
||||
|
||||
delete _tomerge;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
#define TRIALS 30
|
||||
#define SAVEME 1
|
||||
|
||||
//perform boolean operation on the graphs in the list
|
||||
void kbGraphList::Boolean( BOOL_OP operation, int intersectionRunsMax )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC->SetState( "Performing Boolean Operation" );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( count() == 0 )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
kbGraph* _prepared = new kbGraph( _GC );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( empty() )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
//round to grid and put in one graph
|
||||
_GC->SetState( "Simplify" );
|
||||
|
||||
int intersectionruns = 1;
|
||||
|
||||
while ( intersectionruns <= intersectionRunsMax )
|
||||
{
|
||||
try
|
||||
{
|
||||
Prepare( _prepared );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( _prepared->GetNumberOfLinks() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//calculate intersections etc.
|
||||
_GC->SetState( "prepare" );
|
||||
_prepared->Prepare( intersectionruns );
|
||||
//_prepared->writegraph(true);
|
||||
_prepared->Boolean( operation, this );
|
||||
}
|
||||
intersectionruns = intersectionRunsMax + 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
catch ( Bool_Engine_Error & error )
|
||||
{
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY( _GC );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
intersectionruns++;
|
||||
if ( intersectionruns == intersectionRunsMax )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY( _GC );
|
||||
_GC->info( error.GetErrorMessage(), "error" );
|
||||
throw error;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
catch( ... )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY( _GC );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
intersectionruns++;
|
||||
if ( intersectionruns == intersectionRunsMax )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY( _GC );
|
||||
_GC->info( "Unknown exception", "error" );
|
||||
throw;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
delete _prepared;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void kbGraphList::WriteGraphs()
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI = TDLI<kbGraph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->writegraph( false );
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbGraphList::WriteGraphsKEY( Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
FILE * file = fopen( "graphkeyfile.key", "w" );
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf( file, "\
|
||||
HEADER 5; \
|
||||
BGNLIB; \
|
||||
LASTMOD {2-11-15 15:39:21}; \
|
||||
LASTACC {2-11-15 15:39:21}; \
|
||||
LIBNAME trial; \
|
||||
UNITS; \
|
||||
USERUNITS 0.0001; PHYSUNITS 1e-009; \
|
||||
\
|
||||
BGNSTR; \
|
||||
CREATION {2-11-15 15:39:21}; \
|
||||
LASTMOD {2-11-15 15:39:21}; \
|
||||
STRNAME top; \
|
||||
");
|
||||
|
||||
TDLI<kbGraph> _LI=TDLI<kbGraph>(this);
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while(!_LI.hitroot())
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->WriteKEY( GC, file );
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf(file,"\
|
||||
ENDSTR top; \
|
||||
ENDLIB; \
|
||||
");
|
||||
|
||||
fclose (file);
|
||||
}
|
|
@ -1,38 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/src/instonly.cpp
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: instonly.cpp,v 1.3 2009/02/06 21:33:03 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __GNUG__
|
||||
#pragma option -Jgd
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/_dl_itr.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/record.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/scanbeam.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graphlst.h"
|
||||
//#include "kbool/misc.h"
|
||||
|
||||
template class DL_Node<void *>;
|
||||
template class DL_Iter<void *>;
|
||||
template class DL_List<void *>;
|
||||
|
||||
template class DL_Node<int>;
|
||||
template class DL_Iter<int>;
|
||||
template class DL_List<int>;
|
||||
|
||||
template class TDLI<Node>;
|
||||
template class TDLI<LPoint>;
|
||||
template class TDLI<Record>;
|
||||
template class TDLI<KBoolLink>;
|
||||
template class TDLI<Graph>;
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
|
@ -1,721 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file src/link.cpp
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: link.cpp,v 1.4 2009/09/07 19:23:28 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
#include <assert.h>
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graphlst.h"
|
||||
|
||||
int linkXYsorter( kbLink *, kbLink * );
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Default constructor
|
||||
//
|
||||
kbLink::kbLink( Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
Reset();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// This constructor makes this link a valid part of a graph
|
||||
//
|
||||
kbLink::kbLink( int graphnr, kbNode *begin, kbNode *end, Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
Reset();
|
||||
|
||||
// Set the references of the node and of this link correct
|
||||
begin->AddLink( this );
|
||||
end->AddLink( this );
|
||||
m_beginnode = begin;
|
||||
m_endnode = end;
|
||||
m_graphnum = graphnr;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// This constructor makes this link a valid part of a graph
|
||||
//
|
||||
kbLink::kbLink( kbNode *begin, kbNode *end, Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
Reset();
|
||||
|
||||
// Set the references of the node and of this link correct
|
||||
begin->AddLink( this );
|
||||
end->AddLink( this );
|
||||
m_beginnode = begin;
|
||||
m_endnode = end;
|
||||
m_graphnum = 0;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Destructor
|
||||
//
|
||||
kbLink::~kbLink()
|
||||
{
|
||||
UnLink();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Checks whether the current algorithm has been on this link
|
||||
//
|
||||
bool kbLink::BeenHere()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_bin ) return true;
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::TakeOverOperationFlags( kbLink* link )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_merge_L = link->m_merge_L;
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_L = link->m_a_substract_b_L;
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_L = link->m_b_substract_a_L;
|
||||
m_intersect_L = link->m_intersect_L;
|
||||
m_exor_L = link->m_exor_L;
|
||||
|
||||
m_merge_R = link->m_merge_R;
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_R = link->m_a_substract_b_R;
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_R = link->m_b_substract_a_R;
|
||||
m_intersect_R = link->m_intersect_R;
|
||||
m_exor_R = link->m_exor_R;
|
||||
}
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Returns the next link from the argument
|
||||
//
|
||||
kbLink* kbLink::Forth( kbNode *node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
assert( node == m_beginnode || node == m_endnode );
|
||||
return node->GetOtherLink( this );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Returns the Beginnode
|
||||
//
|
||||
kbNode *kbLink::GetBeginNode()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_beginnode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Returns the endnode
|
||||
//
|
||||
kbNode* kbLink::GetEndNode()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_endnode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbNode* kbLink::GetLowNode()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( ( m_beginnode->GetY() < m_endnode->GetY() ) ? m_beginnode : m_endnode );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbNode* kbLink::GetHighNode()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( ( m_beginnode->GetY() > m_endnode->GetY() ) ? m_beginnode : m_endnode );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Returns the graphnumber
|
||||
//
|
||||
int kbLink::GetGraphNum()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_graphnum;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLink::GetInc()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_Inc;
|
||||
// if (Inc) return true;
|
||||
// return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetInc( bool inc )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_Inc = inc;
|
||||
// Inc=0;
|
||||
// if (inc) Inc=1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLink::GetLeftA()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_LeftA;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetLeftA( bool la )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_LeftA = la;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLink::GetLeftB()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_LeftB;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetLeftB( bool lb )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_LeftB = lb;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLink::GetRightA()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_RightA;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetRightA( bool ra )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_RightA = ra;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLink::GetRightB()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_RightB;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetRightB( bool rb )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_RightB = rb;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// This function is very popular by GP-faults
|
||||
// It returns the node different from a
|
||||
//
|
||||
kbNode* kbLink::GetOther( const kbNode *const a )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( ( a != m_beginnode ) ? m_beginnode : m_endnode );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Is this marked for given operation
|
||||
//
|
||||
bool kbLink::IsMarked( BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
switch ( operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case( BOOL_OR ): return m_merge_L || m_merge_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_AND ): return m_intersect_L || m_intersect_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_A_SUB_B ): return m_a_substract_b_L || m_a_substract_b_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_B_SUB_A ): return m_b_substract_a_L || m_b_substract_a_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_EXOR ): return m_exor_L || m_exor_R;
|
||||
default: return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLink::IsMarkedLeft( BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
switch ( operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case( BOOL_OR ): return m_merge_L;
|
||||
case( BOOL_AND ): return m_intersect_L;
|
||||
case( BOOL_A_SUB_B ): return m_a_substract_b_L;
|
||||
case( BOOL_B_SUB_A ): return m_b_substract_a_L;
|
||||
case( BOOL_EXOR ): return m_exor_L;
|
||||
default: return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLink::IsMarkedRight( BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
switch ( operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case( BOOL_OR ): return m_merge_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_AND ): return m_intersect_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_A_SUB_B ): return m_a_substract_b_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_B_SUB_A ): return m_b_substract_a_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_EXOR ): return m_exor_R;
|
||||
default: return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Is this a hole for given operation
|
||||
// beginnode must be to the left
|
||||
bool kbLink::IsHole( BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
bool topsideA, topsideB;
|
||||
|
||||
if ( m_beginnode->GetX() < m_endnode->GetX() ) //going to the right?
|
||||
{ topsideA = m_RightA; topsideB = m_RightB; }
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ topsideA = m_LeftA; topsideB = m_LeftB; }
|
||||
|
||||
switch ( operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case( BOOL_OR ): return ( !topsideB && !topsideA );
|
||||
case( BOOL_AND ): return ( !topsideB || !topsideA );
|
||||
case( BOOL_A_SUB_B ): return ( topsideB || !topsideA );
|
||||
case( BOOL_B_SUB_A ): return ( topsideA || !topsideB );
|
||||
case( BOOL_EXOR ): return !( ( topsideB && !topsideA ) || ( !topsideB && topsideA ) );
|
||||
default: return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Is this a part of a hole
|
||||
//
|
||||
bool kbLink::GetHole()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( m_hole );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetHole( bool h )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_hole = h;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Is this not marked at all
|
||||
//
|
||||
bool kbLink::IsUnused()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return
|
||||
!( m_merge_L || m_merge_R ||
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_L || m_a_substract_b_R ||
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_L || m_b_substract_a_R ||
|
||||
m_intersect_L || m_intersect_R ||
|
||||
m_exor_L || m_exor_R );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLink::IsZero( B_INT marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( m_beginnode->Equal( m_endnode, marge ) ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLink::ShorterThan( B_INT marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( m_beginnode->ShorterThan( m_endnode, marge ) ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Mark this link
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbLink::Mark()
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_mark = true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef ABS
|
||||
#define ABS(a) (((a)<0) ? -(a) : (a))
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// This makes from the begin and endnode one node (argument begin_or_end_node)
|
||||
// The references to this link in the node will also be deleted
|
||||
// After doing that, link link can be deleted or be recycled.
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbLink::MergeNodes( kbNode *const begin_or_end_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// assert(beginnode && endnode);
|
||||
// assert ((begin_or_end_node == beginnode)||(begin_or_end_node == endnode));
|
||||
|
||||
m_beginnode->RemoveLink( this );
|
||||
m_endnode->RemoveLink( this );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( m_endnode != m_beginnode )
|
||||
{ // only if beginnode and endnode are different nodes
|
||||
begin_or_end_node->Merge( GetOther( begin_or_end_node ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
m_endnode = NULL;
|
||||
m_beginnode = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Return the position of the second link compared to this link
|
||||
// Result = IS_ON | IS_LEFT | IS_RIGHT
|
||||
// Here Left and Right is defined as being left or right from
|
||||
// the this link towards the center (common) node
|
||||
//
|
||||
LinkStatus kbLink::OutProduct( kbLink* const two, double accur )
|
||||
{
|
||||
kbNode * center;
|
||||
double distance;
|
||||
if ( two->GetBeginNode()->Equal( two->GetEndNode(), 1 ) )
|
||||
assert( !two );
|
||||
if ( GetBeginNode()->Equal( GetEndNode(), 1 ) )
|
||||
assert( !this );
|
||||
kbLine* temp_line = new kbLine( this, _GC );
|
||||
|
||||
//the this link should connect to the other two link at at least one node
|
||||
if ( m_endnode == two->m_endnode || m_endnode == two->m_beginnode )
|
||||
center = m_endnode;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
center = m_beginnode;
|
||||
// assert(center==two->endnode || center==two->beginnode);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//here something tricky
|
||||
// the factor 10000.0 is needed to asure that the pointonline
|
||||
// is more accurate in this case compared to the intersection for graphs
|
||||
int uitp = temp_line->PointOnLine( two->GetOther( center ), distance, accur );
|
||||
|
||||
delete temp_line;
|
||||
|
||||
/*double uitp= (_x - first._x) * (third._y - _y) -
|
||||
(_y - first._y) * (third._x - _x);
|
||||
if (uitp>0) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
if (uitp<0) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
return IS_ON;*/
|
||||
|
||||
//depending on direction of this link (going to or coming from centre)
|
||||
if ( center == m_endnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( uitp == LEFT_SIDE )
|
||||
return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
if ( uitp == RIGHT_SIDE )
|
||||
return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else //center=beginnode
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( uitp == LEFT_SIDE )
|
||||
return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
if ( uitp == RIGHT_SIDE )
|
||||
return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
return IS_ON;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Return the position of the third link compared to this link and
|
||||
// the second link
|
||||
// Result = IS_ON | IS_LEFT | IS_RIGHT
|
||||
//
|
||||
LinkStatus kbLink::PointOnCorner( kbLink* const two, kbLink* const third )
|
||||
{
|
||||
LinkStatus
|
||||
TwoToOne, // Position of two to this line
|
||||
ThirdToOne, // Position of third to this line
|
||||
ThirdToTwo, // Position of third to two
|
||||
Result;
|
||||
|
||||
//m kbNode* center;
|
||||
|
||||
//the this link should connect to the other two link at at least one node
|
||||
//m if (endnode==two->endnode || endnode==two->beginnode)
|
||||
//m center=endnode;
|
||||
//m else
|
||||
//m { center=beginnode;
|
||||
// assert(center==two->endnode || center==two->beginnode);
|
||||
//m }
|
||||
// assert(center==third->endnode || center==third->beginnode);
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// Calculate the position of the links compared to eachother
|
||||
TwoToOne = OutProduct( two, _GC->GetAccur() );
|
||||
ThirdToOne = OutProduct( third, _GC->GetAccur() );
|
||||
//center is used in outproduct to give de direction of two
|
||||
// this is why the result should be swapped
|
||||
ThirdToTwo = two->OutProduct( third, _GC->GetAccur() );
|
||||
if ( ThirdToTwo == IS_RIGHT )
|
||||
ThirdToTwo = IS_LEFT;
|
||||
else if ( ThirdToTwo == IS_LEFT )
|
||||
ThirdToTwo = IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
|
||||
// Select the result
|
||||
switch( TwoToOne )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// Line 2 lies on leftside of this line
|
||||
case IS_LEFT : if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_RIGHT ) || ( ThirdToTwo == IS_RIGHT ) ) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
else if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_LEFT ) && ( ThirdToTwo == IS_LEFT ) ) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
else Result = IS_ON; break;
|
||||
// Line 2 lies on this line
|
||||
case IS_ON : if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_RIGHT ) && ( ThirdToTwo == IS_RIGHT ) ) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
else if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_LEFT ) && ( ThirdToTwo == IS_LEFT ) ) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
// else if ((ThirdToOne==IS_RIGHT) && (ThirdToTwo==IS_LEFT)) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
// else if ((ThirdToOne==IS_LEFT) && (ThirdToTwo==IS_RIGHT)) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
else Result = IS_ON; break;
|
||||
// Line 2 lies on right side of this line
|
||||
case IS_RIGHT : if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_RIGHT ) && ( ThirdToTwo == IS_RIGHT ) ) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
else if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_LEFT ) || ( ThirdToTwo == IS_LEFT ) ) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
else Result = IS_ON; break;
|
||||
default: Result = IS_ON; assert( false );
|
||||
}
|
||||
return Result;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Remove the reference from this link to a_node
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbLink::Remove( kbNode *a_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
( m_beginnode == a_node ) ? m_beginnode = NULL : m_endnode = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Replace oldnode by newnode and correct the references
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbLink::Replace( kbNode *oldnode, kbNode *newnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_beginnode == oldnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_beginnode->RemoveLink( this ); // remove the reference to this
|
||||
newnode->AddLink( this ); // let newnode refer to this
|
||||
m_beginnode = newnode; // let this refer to newnode
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //assert(endnode==oldnode);
|
||||
m_endnode->RemoveLink( this );
|
||||
newnode->AddLink( this );
|
||||
m_endnode = newnode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Reset all values
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbLink::Reset()
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_beginnode = 0;
|
||||
m_endnode = 0;
|
||||
Reset_flags();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Reset all flags
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbLink::Reset_flags()
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_bin = false; // Marker for walking over the graph
|
||||
m_hole = false; // Is this a part of hole ?
|
||||
m_hole_top = false; // link that is toplink of hole?
|
||||
m_group = GROUP_A; // Does this belong to group A or B ( o.a. for boolean operations between graphs)
|
||||
m_LeftA = false; // Is left in polygongroup A
|
||||
m_RightA = false; // Is right in polygon group A
|
||||
m_LeftB = false; // Is left in polygon group B
|
||||
m_RightB = false; // Is right in polygongroup B
|
||||
m_mark = false; // General purose marker, internally unused
|
||||
m_holelink = false;
|
||||
|
||||
m_merge_L = m_merge_R = false; // Marker for Merge
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_L = m_a_substract_b_R = false; // Marker for substract
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_L = m_b_substract_a_R = false; // Marker for substract
|
||||
m_intersect_L = m_intersect_R = false; // Marker for intersect
|
||||
m_exor_L = m_exor_R = false; // Marker for Exor
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Refill this link by the arguments
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbLink::Reset( kbNode *begin, kbNode *end, int graphnr )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// Remove all the previous references
|
||||
UnLink();
|
||||
Reset();
|
||||
// Set the references of the node and of this link correct
|
||||
begin->AddLink( this );
|
||||
end->AddLink( this );
|
||||
m_beginnode = begin;
|
||||
m_endnode = end;
|
||||
if ( graphnr != 0 )
|
||||
m_graphnum = graphnr;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::Set( kbNode *begin, kbNode *end )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_beginnode = begin;
|
||||
m_endnode = end;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetBeenHere()
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_bin = true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetNotBeenHere()
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_bin = false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetBeginNode( kbNode* new_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_beginnode = new_node;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetEndNode( kbNode* new_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_endnode = new_node;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Sets the graphnumber to argument num
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbLink::SetGraphNum( int num )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_graphnum = num;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
GroupType kbLink::Group()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_group;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Reset the groupflag to argument groep
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbLink::SetGroup( GroupType groep )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_group = groep;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Remove all references to this link and from this link
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbLink::UnLink()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( m_beginnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_beginnode->RemoveLink( this );
|
||||
if ( !m_beginnode->GetNumberOfLinks() ) delete m_beginnode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
m_beginnode = NULL;
|
||||
if ( m_endnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_endnode->RemoveLink( this );
|
||||
if ( !m_endnode->GetNumberOfLinks() ) delete m_endnode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
m_endnode = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::UnMark()
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_mark = false;
|
||||
m_bin = false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetMark( bool value )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_mark = value;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// general purpose mark checker
|
||||
//
|
||||
bool kbLink::IsMarked() { return m_mark; }
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLink::SetTopHole( bool value ) { m_hole_top = value; }
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLink::IsTopHole() { return m_hole_top; }
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Calculates the merge/substact/exor/intersect flags
|
||||
//
|
||||
void kbLink::SetLineTypes()
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_merge_R =
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_R =
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_R =
|
||||
m_intersect_R =
|
||||
m_exor_R =
|
||||
m_merge_L =
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_L =
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_L =
|
||||
m_intersect_L =
|
||||
m_exor_L = false;
|
||||
|
||||
//if left side is in group A and B then it is for the merge
|
||||
m_merge_L = m_LeftA || m_LeftB;
|
||||
m_merge_R = m_RightA || m_RightB;
|
||||
//both in mean does not add to result.
|
||||
if ( m_merge_L && m_merge_R )
|
||||
m_merge_L = m_merge_R = false;
|
||||
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_L = m_LeftA && !m_LeftB;
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_R = m_RightA && !m_RightB;
|
||||
//both in mean does not add to result.
|
||||
if ( m_a_substract_b_L && m_a_substract_b_R )
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_L = m_a_substract_b_R = false;
|
||||
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_L = m_LeftB && !m_LeftA;
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_R = m_RightB && !m_RightA;
|
||||
//both in mean does not add to result.
|
||||
if ( m_b_substract_a_L && m_b_substract_a_R )
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_L = m_b_substract_a_R = false;
|
||||
|
||||
m_intersect_L = m_LeftB && m_LeftA;
|
||||
m_intersect_R = m_RightB && m_RightA;
|
||||
//both in mean does not add to result.
|
||||
if ( m_intersect_L && m_intersect_R )
|
||||
m_intersect_L = m_intersect_R = false;
|
||||
|
||||
m_exor_L = !( ( m_LeftB && m_LeftA ) || ( !m_LeftB && !m_LeftA ) );
|
||||
m_exor_R = !( ( m_RightB && m_RightA ) || ( !m_RightB && !m_RightA ) );
|
||||
//both in mean does not add to result.
|
||||
if ( m_exor_L && m_exor_R )
|
||||
m_exor_L = m_exor_R = false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//put in direction with a_node as beginnode
|
||||
void kbLink::Redirect( kbNode* a_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( a_node != m_beginnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// swap the begin- and endnode of the current link
|
||||
kbNode * dummy = m_beginnode;
|
||||
m_beginnode = m_endnode;
|
||||
m_endnode = dummy;
|
||||
|
||||
bool swap = m_LeftA;
|
||||
m_LeftA = m_RightA;
|
||||
m_RightA = swap;
|
||||
|
||||
swap = m_LeftB;
|
||||
m_LeftB = m_RightB;
|
||||
m_RightB = swap;
|
||||
|
||||
swap = m_merge_L ;
|
||||
m_merge_L = m_merge_R;
|
||||
m_merge_R = swap;
|
||||
|
||||
swap = m_a_substract_b_L;
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_L = m_a_substract_b_R;
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_R = swap;
|
||||
|
||||
swap = m_b_substract_a_L;
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_L = m_b_substract_a_R;
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_R = swap;
|
||||
|
||||
swap = m_intersect_L;
|
||||
m_intersect_L = m_intersect_R;
|
||||
m_intersect_R = swap;
|
||||
|
||||
swap = m_exor_L;
|
||||
m_exor_L = m_exor_R;
|
||||
m_exor_R = swap;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
|
@ -1,199 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file src/lpoint.cpp
|
||||
\brief Definition of GDSII kbLPoint type structure
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: lpoint.cpp,v 1.4 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/lpoint.h"
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
|
||||
// Constructors
|
||||
kbLPoint::kbLPoint()
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = 0;
|
||||
_y = 0;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
kbLPoint::kbLPoint( B_INT const X, B_INT const Y )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = X;
|
||||
_y = Y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
kbLPoint::kbLPoint( kbLPoint* const a_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( !a_point )
|
||||
throw Bool_Engine_Error( "Cannot copy a NULL Point Object.\n\nCould not create a kbLPoint Object.",
|
||||
"Fatal Creation Error", 0, 1 );
|
||||
_x = a_point->_x;
|
||||
_y = a_point->_y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT kbLPoint::GetX()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return _x;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT kbLPoint::GetY()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return _y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLPoint::SetX( B_INT a_point_x )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = a_point_x;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLPoint::SetY( B_INT a_point_y )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_y = a_point_y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
kbLPoint kbLPoint::GetPoint()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return * this;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLPoint::Set( const B_INT X, const B_INT Y )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = X;
|
||||
_y = Y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void kbLPoint::Set( const kbLPoint &a_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = a_point._x;
|
||||
_y = a_point._y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLPoint::Equal( const kbLPoint a_point, B_INT Marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
B_INT delta_x, delta_y;
|
||||
|
||||
delta_x = babs( ( _x - a_point._x ) );
|
||||
delta_y = babs( ( _y - a_point._y ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( ( delta_x <= Marge ) && ( delta_y <= Marge ) )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
else
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLPoint::Equal( const B_INT X, const B_INT Y, B_INT Marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( bool )( ( babs( _x - X ) <= Marge ) && ( babs( _y - Y ) <= Marge ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLPoint::ShorterThan( const kbLPoint a_point, B_INT Marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
double a, b;
|
||||
a = ( double ) ( a_point._x - _x );
|
||||
a *= a;
|
||||
b = ( double ) ( a_point._y - _y );
|
||||
b *= b;
|
||||
|
||||
return ( bool ) ( ( a + b ) <= Marge * Marge ? true : false ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbLPoint::ShorterThan( const B_INT X, const B_INT Y, B_INT Marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
double a, b;
|
||||
a = ( double ) ( X - _x );
|
||||
a *= a;
|
||||
b = ( double ) ( Y - _y );
|
||||
b *= b;
|
||||
|
||||
return ( bool ) ( a + b <= Marge * Marge ? true : false ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// overload the assign (=) operator
|
||||
// usage : a_point = another_point;
|
||||
|
||||
kbLPoint &kbLPoint::operator=( const kbLPoint &other_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = other_point._x;
|
||||
_y = other_point._y;
|
||||
return *this;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// overload the + operator
|
||||
// usage : a_point = point1 + point2;
|
||||
|
||||
kbLPoint &kbLPoint::operator+( const kbLPoint &other_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x += other_point._x;
|
||||
_y += other_point._y;
|
||||
return *this;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// overload the - operator
|
||||
// usage : a_point = point1 - point2;
|
||||
|
||||
kbLPoint &kbLPoint::operator-( const kbLPoint &other_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x -= other_point._x;
|
||||
_y -= other_point._y;
|
||||
return *this;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// overload the * operator
|
||||
// usage: a_point = point1 * 100;
|
||||
|
||||
kbLPoint &kbLPoint::operator*( int factor )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x *= factor;
|
||||
_y *= factor;
|
||||
return *this;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// overload the / operator
|
||||
// usage: a_point = point1 / 100;
|
||||
|
||||
kbLPoint &kbLPoint::operator/( int factor )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x /= factor;
|
||||
_y /= factor;
|
||||
return *this;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// overload the compare (==) operator
|
||||
// usage: if (point1 == point2) { };
|
||||
|
||||
int kbLPoint::operator==( const kbLPoint &other_point ) const
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( ( other_point._x == _x ) && ( other_point._y == _y ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// overload the diffrent (!=) operator
|
||||
// usage: if (point1 != point2) { };
|
||||
|
||||
int kbLPoint::operator!=( const kbLPoint &other_point ) const
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( ( other_point._x != _x ) || ( other_point._y != _y ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,620 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file src/node.cpp
|
||||
\brief Holds a GDSII node structure
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: node.cpp,v 1.7 2009/09/14 16:50:12 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
|
||||
//this here is to initialize the static iterator of node
|
||||
//with NOLIST constructor
|
||||
//TDLI<kbLink> kbNode::_linkiter=TDLI<kbLink>(_GC);
|
||||
|
||||
kbNode::kbNode( Bool_Engine* GC ) : kbLPoint( 0, 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
_linklist = new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
kbNode::kbNode( B_INT const X, B_INT const Y, Bool_Engine* GC ) : kbLPoint( X, Y )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
_linklist = new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
kbNode::kbNode( kbLPoint* const a_point, Bool_Engine* GC ) : kbLPoint( a_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
_linklist = new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//kbNode::kbNode(kbNode * const other) : kbLPoint(other)
|
||||
kbNode::kbNode( kbNode * const other, Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
_x = other->_x;
|
||||
_y = other->_y;
|
||||
_linklist = new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbNode& kbNode::operator=( const kbNode &other_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = other_node._x;
|
||||
_y = other_node._y;
|
||||
|
||||
return *this;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// x and y of the point will be rounded to the nearest
|
||||
// xnew=N*grid and ynew=N*grid
|
||||
void kbNode::RoundInt( B_INT grid )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = ( B_INT ) floor( ( _x + grid * 0.5 ) / grid ) * grid;
|
||||
_y = ( B_INT ) floor( ( _y + grid * 0.5 ) / grid ) * grid;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbNode::~kbNode()
|
||||
{
|
||||
delete _linklist;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* kbNode::GetLinklist()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return _linklist;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbNode::AddLink( kbLink *a_link )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// assert(a_link);
|
||||
_linklist->insbegin( a_link );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbLink* kbNode::GetIncomingLink()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( ( ( kbLink* )_linklist->headitem() )->GetEndNode() == this )
|
||||
return ( kbLink* )_linklist->headitem();
|
||||
else
|
||||
return ( kbLink* )_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbLink* kbNode::GetOutgoingLink()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( ( ( kbLink* )_linklist->headitem() )->GetBeginNode() == this )
|
||||
return ( kbLink* )_linklist->headitem();
|
||||
else
|
||||
return ( kbLink* )_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Returns the number of connected links
|
||||
//
|
||||
int kbNode::GetNumberOfLinks()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return _linklist->count();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbLink* kbNode::GetOtherLink( kbLink* prev )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( prev == ( kbLink* )_linklist->headitem() )
|
||||
return ( kbLink* )_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
if ( prev == ( kbLink* )_linklist->tailitem() )
|
||||
return ( kbLink* )_linklist->headitem();
|
||||
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
int kbNode::Merge( kbNode *other )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( this == other ) //they are already merged dummy
|
||||
return 0;
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
int Counter;
|
||||
// used to delete Iterator on other->_linklist
|
||||
// otherwise there can't be a takeover, because for takeover there can't
|
||||
// be an iterator on other->_linklist;
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<kbLink> Iother( other->_linklist );
|
||||
kbLink* temp;
|
||||
|
||||
Counter = Iother.count();
|
||||
|
||||
Iother.tohead();
|
||||
while ( !Iother.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
temp = Iother.item();
|
||||
//need to test both nodes because it may be a zero length link
|
||||
if ( temp->GetEndNode() == other )
|
||||
temp->SetEndNode( this );
|
||||
if ( temp->GetBeginNode() == other )
|
||||
temp->SetBeginNode( this );
|
||||
Iother++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->takeover( &Iother );
|
||||
}
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
|
||||
//at this moment the other nodes has no link pointing to it so it needs to be deleted
|
||||
delete other;
|
||||
return Counter;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void kbNode::RemoveLink( kbLink *a_link )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// assert(a_link);
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( _GC->_linkiter->toitem( a_link ) ) // find the link
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->remove();
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// This function will determinate if the given three points
|
||||
// can be simplified to two points
|
||||
//
|
||||
// input : three nodes, the first and the second must be points of
|
||||
// a line in correct order, the third point is a point of another
|
||||
// line.
|
||||
// output: -
|
||||
// return: true if points can be simplified
|
||||
// false if points can't be simplified
|
||||
bool kbNode::Simplify( kbNode *First, kbNode *Second, B_INT Marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
double distance = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
// The first and second point are a zero line, if so we can
|
||||
// make a line between the first and third point
|
||||
if ( First->Equal( Second, Marge ) )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
|
||||
// Are the first and third point equal, if so
|
||||
// we can delete the second point
|
||||
if ( First->Equal( this, Marge ) )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
|
||||
// Used tmp_link.set here, because the link may not be linked in the graph,
|
||||
// because the point of the graphs are used, after use of the line we have
|
||||
//to set the link to zero so the nodes will not be destructed by exit of the function
|
||||
kbLink tmp_link( _GC );
|
||||
tmp_link.Set( First, Second );
|
||||
kbLine tmp_line( _GC );
|
||||
tmp_line.Set( &tmp_link );
|
||||
|
||||
// If third point is on the same line which is made from the first
|
||||
// and second point then we can delete the second point
|
||||
if ( tmp_line.PointOnLine( this, distance, ( double ) Marge ) == ON_AREA )
|
||||
{
|
||||
tmp_link.Set( NULL, NULL );
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
//
|
||||
//
|
||||
tmp_link.Set( Second, this );
|
||||
tmp_line.Set( &tmp_link );
|
||||
if ( tmp_line.PointOnLine( First, distance, ( double ) Marge ) == ON_AREA )
|
||||
{
|
||||
tmp_link.Set( NULL, NULL );
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
tmp_link.Set( NULL, NULL );
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
kbLink* kbNode::GetNextLink()
|
||||
{
|
||||
int Aantal = _linklist->count();
|
||||
|
||||
// assert (Aantal != 0);
|
||||
|
||||
// there is one link, so there is no previous link
|
||||
if ( Aantal == 1 )
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
int Marked_Counter = 0;
|
||||
kbLink *the_link = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
// count the marked links
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->tohead();
|
||||
while ( !_GC->_linkiter->hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( _GC->_linkiter->item()->IsMarked() )
|
||||
Marked_Counter++;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( !the_link )
|
||||
the_link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
}
|
||||
( *_GC->_linkiter )++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
if ( Aantal - Marked_Counter != 1 )
|
||||
// there arent two unmarked links
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( the_link->GetBeginNode() == this )
|
||||
return the_link;
|
||||
else
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
kbLink* kbNode::GetPrevLink()
|
||||
{
|
||||
int Aantal;
|
||||
if ( !_linklist )
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
Aantal = _linklist->count();
|
||||
|
||||
// assert (Aantal != 0);
|
||||
|
||||
// there is one link, so there is no previous link
|
||||
if ( Aantal == 1 )
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
int Marked_Counter = 0;
|
||||
kbLink *the_link = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
// count the marked links
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->tohead();
|
||||
while ( !_GC->_linkiter->hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( _GC->_linkiter->item()->IsMarked() )
|
||||
Marked_Counter++;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( !the_link )
|
||||
the_link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
}
|
||||
( *_GC->_linkiter )++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
if ( Aantal - Marked_Counter != 1 )
|
||||
// there arent two unmarked links
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( the_link->GetEndNode() == this )
|
||||
return the_link;
|
||||
else
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbNode::SameSides( kbLink* const prev , kbLink* const link, BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
bool directedLeft;
|
||||
bool directedRight;
|
||||
if ( prev->GetEndNode() == this ) //forward direction
|
||||
{
|
||||
directedLeft = prev->IsMarkedLeft( operation );
|
||||
directedRight = prev->IsMarkedRight( operation );
|
||||
if ( link->GetBeginNode() == this ) //forward direction
|
||||
{
|
||||
return directedLeft == link->IsMarkedLeft( operation ) &&
|
||||
directedRight == link->IsMarkedRight( operation );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
return directedLeft == link->IsMarkedRight( operation ) &&
|
||||
directedRight == link->IsMarkedLeft( operation );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
directedLeft = prev->IsMarkedRight( operation );
|
||||
directedRight = prev->IsMarkedLeft( operation );
|
||||
if ( link->GetBeginNode() == this ) //forward direction
|
||||
{
|
||||
return directedLeft == link->IsMarkedLeft( operation ) &&
|
||||
directedRight == link->IsMarkedRight( operation );
|
||||
}
|
||||
return directedLeft == link->IsMarkedRight( operation ) &&
|
||||
directedRight == link->IsMarkedLeft( operation );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// on the node get the link
|
||||
// is the most right or left one
|
||||
// This function is used to collect the simple graphs from a graph
|
||||
kbLink* kbNode::GetMost( kbLink* const prev , LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
kbLink * reserve = 0;
|
||||
kbLink *Result = NULL, *link;
|
||||
kbNode* prevbegin = prev->GetOther( this );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( _linklist->count() == 2 ) // only two links to this node take the one != prev
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( ( link = ( kbLink* )_linklist->headitem() ) == prev ) //this is NOT the one to go on
|
||||
link = ( kbLink* )_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
if ( !link->BeenHere() && SameSides( prev, link, operation ) )
|
||||
//we are back where we started (bin is true) return Null
|
||||
return link;
|
||||
return( 0 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->tohead();
|
||||
//more then 2 links to the kbNode
|
||||
while( !_GC->_linkiter->hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if ( !link->BeenHere() &&
|
||||
SameSides( prev, link, operation ) &&
|
||||
link != prev //should be set to bin already
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( prevbegin == link->GetOther( this ) )//pointers equal
|
||||
//we are going back in the same direction on a parallel link
|
||||
//only take this possibility if nothing else is possible
|
||||
reserve = link;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //this link is in a different direction
|
||||
if ( !Result )
|
||||
Result = link; //first one found sofar
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( prev->PointOnCorner( Result, link ) == whatside )
|
||||
//more to the whatside than take this one
|
||||
Result = link;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
( *_GC->_linkiter )++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// if there is a next link found return it
|
||||
// else if a parallel link is found return that one
|
||||
// else return NULL
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return ( ( Result ) ? Result : reserve );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// on the node get the link
|
||||
// is the most right or left one
|
||||
// This function is used to collect the simple graphs from a graph
|
||||
kbLink* kbNode::GetMostHole( kbLink* const prev, LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP operation, bool searchholelink )
|
||||
{
|
||||
kbLink * reserve = 0;
|
||||
kbLink *Result = NULL, *link;
|
||||
kbNode* prevbegin = prev->GetOther( this );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( _linklist->count() == 2 ) // only two links to this node take the one != prev
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( ( link = ( kbLink* )_linklist->headitem() ) == prev ) //this is NOT the one to go on
|
||||
link = ( kbLink* )_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
if (
|
||||
!link->BeenHere() &&
|
||||
link->GetHole() &&
|
||||
( searchholelink && link->GetHoleLink() || !link->GetHoleLink() ) &&
|
||||
SameSides( prev, link, operation ) )
|
||||
//we are back where we started (bin is true) return Null
|
||||
return link;
|
||||
return( 0 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->tohead();
|
||||
//more then 2 links to the kbNode
|
||||
while( !_GC->_linkiter->hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if (
|
||||
!link->BeenHere() &&
|
||||
link->GetHole() &&
|
||||
( searchholelink && link->GetHoleLink() || !link->GetHoleLink() ) &&
|
||||
SameSides( prev, link, operation ) &&
|
||||
link != prev //should be set to bin already
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( prevbegin == link->GetOther( this ) )//pointers equal
|
||||
//we are going back in the same direction on a parallel link
|
||||
//only take this possibility if nothing else is possible
|
||||
reserve = link;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //this link is in a different direction
|
||||
if ( !Result )
|
||||
Result = link; //first one found sofar
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( prev->PointOnCorner( Result, link ) == whatside )
|
||||
//more to the whatside than take this one
|
||||
Result = link;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
( *_GC->_linkiter )++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// if there is a next link found return it
|
||||
// else if a parallel link is found return that one
|
||||
// else return NULL
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return ( ( Result ) ? Result : reserve );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// this function gets the highest not flat link
|
||||
kbLink* kbNode::GetHoleLink( kbLink* const prev, LinkStatus whatside, bool checkbin, BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
kbLink * Result = NULL, *link;
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
|
||||
for( _GC->_linkiter->tohead();!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot();( *_GC->_linkiter )++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if ( link->GetHoleLink() &&
|
||||
( !checkbin || ( checkbin && !link->BeenHere() ) ) &&
|
||||
SameSides( prev, link, operation )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( !Result )
|
||||
Result = link; //first one found sofar
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( prev->PointOnCorner( Result, link ) == whatside )
|
||||
//more to the whatside than take this one
|
||||
Result = link;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return ( Result );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// this function gets the highest not flat link
|
||||
kbLink* kbNode::GetNotFlat()
|
||||
{
|
||||
kbLink * Result = NULL, *link;
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
|
||||
double tangold = 0.0;
|
||||
double tangnew = 0.0;
|
||||
|
||||
for( _GC->_linkiter->tohead();!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot();( *_GC->_linkiter )++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if ( !_GC->_linkiter->item()->BeenHere() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
B_INT dx = link->GetOther( this )->GetX() - _x;
|
||||
B_INT dy = link->GetOther( this )->GetY() - _y;
|
||||
if ( dx != 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
tangnew = fabs( ( double ) dy / ( double ) dx );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
tangnew = MAXDOUBLE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if ( !Result )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//this link is in a different direction
|
||||
Result = link; //first one found sofar
|
||||
tangold = tangnew;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( tangnew < tangold )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//this one is higher (more horizontal) then the old Result
|
||||
Result = link;
|
||||
tangold = tangnew;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// if there is a next link found return it
|
||||
// else if a parallel link is found return that one
|
||||
// else return NULL
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return ( Result );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// on the node get the link that is not BIN
|
||||
// and that has the same graphnumber and is in same direction
|
||||
kbLink *kbNode::Follow( kbLink* const prev )
|
||||
{
|
||||
kbLink * temp;
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->tohead();
|
||||
while( !_GC->_linkiter->hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( ( _GC->_linkiter->item() != prev ) &&
|
||||
( !_GC->_linkiter->item()->BeenHere() ) &&
|
||||
( _GC->_linkiter->item()->GetGraphNum() == prev->GetGraphNum() ) &&
|
||||
(
|
||||
( ( prev->GetEndNode() == this ) &&
|
||||
( _GC->_linkiter->item()->GetEndNode() != this )
|
||||
)
|
||||
||
|
||||
( ( prev->GetBeginNode() == this ) &&
|
||||
( _GC->_linkiter->item()->GetBeginNode() != this )
|
||||
)
|
||||
)
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
temp = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return( temp );
|
||||
}
|
||||
( *_GC->_linkiter )++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return ( 0 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// this function gets the highest (other node) link ascending from the node
|
||||
// that has the bin flag set as the argument binset
|
||||
// if no such link exists return 0
|
||||
kbLink* kbNode::GetBinHighest( bool binset )
|
||||
{
|
||||
kbLink * Result = NULL, *link;
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
|
||||
double tangold = 0.0;
|
||||
double tangnew = 0.0;
|
||||
|
||||
for( _GC->_linkiter->tohead();!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot();( *_GC->_linkiter )++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if ( _GC->_linkiter->item()->BeenHere() == binset )
|
||||
{
|
||||
B_INT dx = link->GetOther( this )->GetX() - _x;
|
||||
B_INT dy = link->GetOther( this )->GetY() - _y;
|
||||
if ( dx != 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
tangnew = ( double ) dy / ( double ) dx;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if ( dy > 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
tangnew = MAXDOUBLE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
tangnew = -MAXDOUBLE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if ( !Result )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Result = link; //first one found sofar
|
||||
tangold = tangnew;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( tangnew > tangold )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//this one is higher then the old Result
|
||||
Result = link;
|
||||
tangold = tangnew;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// if there is a link found return it
|
||||
// else return NULL
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return ( Result );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,352 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file src/record.cpp
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda or Julian Smart
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: record.cpp,v 1.5 2009/09/10 17:04:09 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/record.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include <stdlib.h>
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
|
||||
#define LNK _line.GetLink()
|
||||
|
||||
//int r_index=-1;
|
||||
//void* _Record_Pool[30];
|
||||
|
||||
//void DeleteRecordPool()
|
||||
//{
|
||||
// while (r_index!=-1)
|
||||
// {
|
||||
// free( _Record_Pool[r_index--]);
|
||||
// }
|
||||
//}
|
||||
|
||||
kbRecord::~kbRecord()
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//void* kbRecord::operator new(size_t size)
|
||||
//{
|
||||
//
|
||||
// if (r_index!=-1)
|
||||
// {
|
||||
// return _Record_Pool[r_index--];
|
||||
// }
|
||||
//
|
||||
// return malloc(size);
|
||||
//}
|
||||
|
||||
//void kbRecord::operator delete(void* recordptr)
|
||||
//{
|
||||
//
|
||||
// if (r_index < 28)
|
||||
// {
|
||||
// _Record_Pool[++r_index]= recordptr;
|
||||
// return;
|
||||
// }
|
||||
//
|
||||
// free (recordptr);
|
||||
//}
|
||||
|
||||
//void kbRecord::deletepool()
|
||||
//{
|
||||
//
|
||||
// while (r_index!=-1)
|
||||
// {
|
||||
// free( _Record_Pool[r_index--]);
|
||||
// }
|
||||
//}
|
||||
|
||||
kbRecord::kbRecord( kbLink* link, Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
: _line( GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
_dir = GO_RIGHT;
|
||||
_a = 0;
|
||||
_b = 0;
|
||||
_line.Set( link );
|
||||
_line.CalculateLineParameters();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//when the dimensions of a link for a record changes, its line parameters need to be recalculated
|
||||
void kbRecord::SetNewLink( kbLink* link )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_line.Set( link );
|
||||
_line.CalculateLineParameters();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//for beams calculate the ysp on the low scanline
|
||||
void kbRecord::Calc_Ysp( kbNode* low )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( ( LNK->GetEndNode() == low ) || ( LNK->GetBeginNode() == low ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_ysp = low->GetY();
|
||||
return;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if ( LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX() == LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX() )
|
||||
_ysp = low->GetY(); //flatlink only in flatbeams
|
||||
else if ( LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX() == low->GetX() )
|
||||
_ysp = LNK->GetEndNode()->GetY();
|
||||
else if ( LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX() == low->GetX() )
|
||||
_ysp = LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetY();
|
||||
else
|
||||
_ysp = _line.Calculate_Y_from_X( low->GetX() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//to set the _dir for new links in the beam
|
||||
void kbRecord::Set_Flags()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX() == LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX() ) //flatlink ?
|
||||
{ //only happens in flat beams
|
||||
if ( LNK->GetEndNode()->GetY() < LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetY() )
|
||||
_dir = GO_RIGHT;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_dir = GO_LEFT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX() > LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX() )
|
||||
_dir = GO_RIGHT;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_dir = GO_LEFT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
kbLink* kbRecord::GetLink()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return LNK;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT kbRecord::Ysp()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return _ysp;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void kbRecord::SetYsp( B_INT ysp )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_ysp = ysp;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
DIRECTION kbRecord::Direction()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DIRECTION( _dir );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbRecord::Calc_Left_Right( kbRecord* record_above_me )
|
||||
{
|
||||
bool par = false;
|
||||
|
||||
if ( !record_above_me ) //null if no record above
|
||||
{ _a = 0;_b = 0; }
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
_a = record_above_me->_a;
|
||||
_b = record_above_me->_b;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
switch ( _dir & 1 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case GO_LEFT : if ( LNK->Group() == GROUP_A )
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetWindingRule() )
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _a++ : _a--;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //ALTERNATE
|
||||
if ( _a )
|
||||
_a = 0;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_a = 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetWindingRule() )
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _b++ : _b--;
|
||||
else //ALTERNATE
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( _b )
|
||||
_b = 0;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_b = 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case GO_RIGHT : if ( LNK->Group() == GROUP_A )
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetWindingRule() )
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _a++ : _a--;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //ALTERNATE
|
||||
if ( _a )
|
||||
_a = 0;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_a = 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetWindingRule() )
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _b++ : _b--;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //ALTERNATE
|
||||
if ( _b )
|
||||
_b = 0;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_b = 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
break;
|
||||
default : _GC->error( "Undefined Direction of link", "function IScanBeam::Calc_Set_Left_Right()" );
|
||||
break;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//THE NEXT WILL WORK for MOST windingrule polygons,
|
||||
//even when not taking into acount windingrule
|
||||
// not all
|
||||
/*
|
||||
switch (_dir&1)
|
||||
{
|
||||
case GO_LEFT : if (LNK->Group() == GROUP_A)
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
|
||||
if (booleng->Get_WindingRule())
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _a++ : _a--;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_a--;
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA((bool)(_a > 0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
|
||||
if (booleng->Get_WindingRule())
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _b++ : _b--;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_b--;
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
}
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case GO_RIGHT : if (LNK->Group() == GROUP_A)
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
|
||||
if (booleng->Get_WindingRule())
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _a++ : _a--;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_a++;
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
|
||||
if (booleng->Get_WindingRule())
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _b++ : _b--;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_b++;
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
}
|
||||
break;
|
||||
default : _messagehandler->error("Undefined Direction of link","function IScanBeam::Calc_Set_Left_Right()");
|
||||
break;
|
||||
}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
//if the records are parallel (same begin/endnodes)
|
||||
//the above link a/b flag are adjusted to the current a/b depth
|
||||
if ( record_above_me && Equal( record_above_me ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
par = true;
|
||||
LNK->Mark();
|
||||
record_above_me->_a = _a;
|
||||
record_above_me->_b = _b;
|
||||
if ( Direction() == GO_LEFT )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//set the bottom side of the above link
|
||||
if ( record_above_me->Direction() == GO_LEFT )
|
||||
{
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftA( LNK->GetLeftA() );
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftB( LNK->GetLeftB() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightA( LNK->GetLeftA() );
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightB( LNK->GetLeftB() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
//set the bottom side of the above link
|
||||
if ( record_above_me->Direction() == GO_LEFT )
|
||||
{
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftA( LNK->GetRightA() );
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftB( LNK->GetRightB() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightA( LNK->GetRightA() );
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightB( LNK->GetRightB() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
return par;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool kbRecord::Equal( kbRecord *a )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return( ( bool )( ( LNK->GetOther( a->LNK->GetBeginNode() ) == a->LNK->GetEndNode() ) &&
|
||||
( LNK->GetOther( a->LNK->GetEndNode() ) == a->LNK->GetBeginNode() ) ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
kbLine* kbRecord::GetLine()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return & _line;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
|
@ -88,10 +88,10 @@ bool TestLineHit( int xi, int yi, int xf, int yf, int x, int y, double dist )
|
|||
bool FindSegmentIntersections( int xi, int yi, int xf, int yf,
|
||||
int xi2, int yi2, int xf2, int yf2 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( max( xi, xf ) < min( xi2, xf2 )
|
||||
|| min( xi, xf ) > max( xi2, xf2 )
|
||||
|| max( yi, yf ) < min( yi2, yf2 )
|
||||
|| min( yi, yf ) > max( yi2, yf2 ) )
|
||||
if( std::max( xi, xf ) < std::min( xi2, xf2 )
|
||||
|| std::min( xi, xf ) > std::max( xi2, xf2 )
|
||||
|| std::max( yi, yf ) < std::min( yi2, yf2 )
|
||||
|| std::min( yi, yf ) > std::max( yi2, yf2 ) )
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
|
||||
return TestForIntersectionOfStraightLineSegments( xi, yi, xf, yf,
|
||||
|
@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ bool FindLineSegmentIntersection( double a, double b, int xi, int yi, int xf, in
|
|||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if( dist )
|
||||
*dist = min( abs( a - xi ), abs( a - xf ) );
|
||||
*dist = std::min( abs( a - xi ), abs( a - xf ) );
|
||||
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -450,16 +450,16 @@ int GetClearanceBetweenSegments( int x1i, int y1i, int x1f, int y1f, int w1,
|
|||
// check clearance between bounding rectangles
|
||||
int min_dist = max_cl + ( (w1 + w2) / 2 );
|
||||
|
||||
if( min( x1i, x1f ) - max( x2i, x2f ) > min_dist )
|
||||
if( std::min( x1i, x1f ) - std::max( x2i, x2f ) > min_dist )
|
||||
return max_cl+1;
|
||||
|
||||
if( min( x2i, x2f ) - max( x1i, x1f ) > min_dist )
|
||||
if( std::min( x2i, x2f ) - std::max( x1i, x1f ) > min_dist )
|
||||
return max_cl+1;
|
||||
|
||||
if( min( y1i, y1f ) - max( y2i, y2f ) > min_dist )
|
||||
if( std::min( y1i, y1f ) - std::max( y2i, y2f ) > min_dist )
|
||||
return max_cl+1;
|
||||
|
||||
if( min( y2i, y2f ) - max( y1i, y1f ) > min_dist )
|
||||
if( std::min( y2i, y2f ) - std::max( y1i, y1f ) > min_dist )
|
||||
return max_cl+1;
|
||||
|
||||
int xx, yy;
|
||||
|
@ -535,7 +535,7 @@ double GetPointToLineSegmentDistance( int x, int y, int xi, int yi, int xf, int
|
|||
if( InRange( y, yi, yf ) )
|
||||
return abs( x - xi );
|
||||
else
|
||||
return min( Distance( x, y, xi, yi ), Distance( x, y, xf, yf ) );
|
||||
return std::min( Distance( x, y, xi, yi ), Distance( x, y, xf, yf ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if( yf==yi )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ double GetPointToLineSegmentDistance( int x, int y, int xi, int yi, int xf, int
|
|||
if( InRange( x, xi, xf ) )
|
||||
return abs( y - yi );
|
||||
else
|
||||
return min( Distance( x, y, xi, yi ), Distance( x, y, xf, yf ) );
|
||||
return std::min( Distance( x, y, xi, yi ), Distance( x, y, xf, yf ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ double GetPointToLineSegmentDistance( int x, int y, int xi, int yi, int xf, int
|
|||
if( InRange( xp, xi, xf ) && InRange( yp, yi, yf ) )
|
||||
return Distance( x, y, xp, yp );
|
||||
else
|
||||
return min( Distance( x, y, xi, yi ), Distance( x, y, xf, yf ) );
|
||||
return std::min( Distance( x, y, xi, yi ), Distance( x, y, xf, yf ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
Loading…
Reference in New Issue